shiloh house family resource center current/shiloh house project... · 12/14/2011 · denver,...

Shiloh House Family Resource Center

Addendum #4

Revised specification sections

9700 E. Easter Lane, Centennial, CO 80112.

Davis Partnership: 13104.00

11/12/2014

1 1

OWNER

Shiloh Home, Inc. 6350 W. Coal Mine Ave Littleton, CO 80123 P. 303.932.8599 F

Austin Topolnicki [email protected]

ARCHITECT OF RECORD

DAVIS PARTNERSHIP ARCHITECTS 2301 Blake St., Suite 100 Denver, Colorado 80205 P. 303.861.8555 F. 303.861.3027

Joe Lear

Jena Lester [email protected]

INTERIOR DESIGN


Emily Price [email protected]

MECHANICAL ENGINEER

Olson Plumbing and Heating 121 West Cucharras Street Colorado Springs, CO 80903 P. 719-635-3563 F

Michael Fullman [email protected]

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

Martino & Luth 820 16th Street Mall #835 Denver, CO 80202 P.303.260.7118 F.

Russ Martino [email protected]

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER

LEI Companies, Inc. 2017 Curtis Street Denver, CO 80205 P. 303-865-5212 F

Stephen Jack [email protected]

CIVIL ENGINEER

Redland 8000 South Lincoln Street #206 Littleton, CO 80122 P.720.283.6783 F.

Mark Cevaal [email protected]

PLUMBING ENGINEERING

Olson Plumbing and Heating 121 West Cucharras Street Colorado Springs, CO 80903 P. 719-635-3563 F

Michael Fullman [email protected]

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT


Julie Eck [email protected]

ACOUSTICAL CONSULTANT

Geiler & Associates 12355 E. Cornell Ave. Aurora, CO 80014 P.303.766.7104 F.

Jeff Geiler [email protected]

CONTRACTOR

H.W. Houston 16562 W. 48th Lane Golden, CO 80403 P. 303.518.5001 F.

William Jones [email protected]

Shiloh House

Addendum #4

Shiloh HouseCentennial, CODPA 13104.00

Addendum #4November 12, 2014

Date Issued3/25/2014

5/7/2014

6/24/2014

7/25/2014

11/12/2014

Division / Section # Specification Section Title ADD #4 11/12/2014Div 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 0101 1000 Summary X01 2100 Allowances X01 2200 Unit Prices X01 2300 Alternates X01 2500 Substitution Procedures X01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures X01 2900 Payment Procedures X01 3100 Project Management and Coordination X01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation X01 3300 Submittal Procedures X01 4000 Quality Requirements X01 4100 Special Inspections X01 4200 References X01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls X01 6000 Product Requirements X01 7300 Execution X01 7700 Closeout Procedures X01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data X01 7839 Project Record Documents X01 7900 Demonstration and Training X03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete X03 4500 Precast Architectural Concrete X03 6000 Grout X04 2200 Concrete Unit Masonry X04 2613 Masonry Veneer X05 1200 Structural Steel Framing X05 2100 Steel Joist Framing X05 3100 Steel Decking X05 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing X05 5000 Metal Fabrications X05 5113 Metal Pan Stairs X

DP4 - CD's 07/25/2014

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Design Packages IssuesDP1 - SD's 03/25/2014DP2 - DD's 05/07/2014DP3 - PERMIT 06/24/2014

DP5 - ADDENDUM #4 11/12/2014

Table of Contents 1 of 4 TOC 1



05 5213 Pipe and Tube Railings X06 0660 3Form Transulcent Resin Panels X06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry X06 1600 Sheathing X06 2023 Interior Finish Carpentry X06 4116 Plastic Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets X06 6400 Plastic Paneling X07 1416 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing X07 2100 Thermal Insulation X07 4213.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels X07 4213.53 Metal Soffit Panels X07 4646 Fiber-Cement Siding X

07 5323 Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing X07 5423 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing X07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim X07 7100 Roof Specialties X07 7200 Roof Accessories X

07 8100 Applied Fireproofing X07 8413 Penetration Firestopping X07 9200 Joint Sealants X08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames X08 1416 Flush Wood Doors X08 3313 Coiling Counter Doors X08 4213 Aluminum-Framed Entrances X08 7100 Door Hardware X08 7113 Automatic Door Operators X08 8000 Glazing X09 2116.23 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies X09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing X09 2900 Gypsum Board X09 3013 Ceramic Tiling X09 3023 Glass Tiling X09 5123 Acoustical Tile Ceilings X09 6000 Moisture Mitigation X09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories X09 6519 Resilient Tile Flooring X09 6723 Resinous Flooring X09 6813 Tile Carpeting X09 9113 Exterior Painting X09 9123 Interior Painting X09 9600 High-Performance Coatings X09 9620 Anti-Graffiti Coatings X10 2113.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments X10 2116.19 Shower Compartments X10 2239 Folding Panel Partitions X10 2600 Wall and Door Protection X10 2800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories X10 4413 Fire Protection Cabinets X10 4416 Fire Extinguishers X




11 4000 Foodservice Equipment X11 6800 Play Field Equipment and Structures X12 2413 Roller Window Shades X12 3661 Simulated Stone Countertops X12 9300 Site Furnishings X14 2400 Hydraulic Elevators X

22 0500 Basic Plumbing Requirements X

22 0519 Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping X

22 0523 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping X

22 0524 Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves X

22 0529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment X22 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment X22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation X22 1005 Plumbing Piping X22 1005 Plumbing Piping Specialties X22 1429 Sump Pumps X22 3000 Plumbing Equipment X

22 4000 Plumbing Fixtures X23 0010 Basic Mechanical Requirements X23 0035 Demolition X23 0513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment X23 0514 Variable Frequency Drivers for HVAC X23 0520 Hangers and Supports X23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment X23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC X23 0713 Duct Insulation X23 0716 HVAC Equipment Insulation X23 3113 HVAC Ductwork X23 3300 Air Duct Accessories X23 3416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans X23 3600 Air Terminal Units X

23 3713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles X23 7413 Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units X26 0000 Electrical Systems X

31 1000 Site Clearing X31 2000 Earth Moving X31 6329 Drilled Concete Piers and Shafts X

32 1216 Asphalt Paving X32 1313 Concrete Paving X32 1373 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants X

32 1600 Polymer Bound Aggregate Surfaces X

32 1816.13 Playground Protective Surfacing X32 3119 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates X

32 8400 Planting Irrigation X

32 9200 Turf and Grasses X

32 9300 Plants X33 1000 Water Utilities X33 3000 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities X

33 4000 Storm Drainage Utilities X




33 4600 Subdrainage X

Table of Contents End of Section


Shiloh House Centennial, CO Project #: DPA 13104.00

Addendum 4

11/12/2014

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-1

SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 specification sections apply to the work of this section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Extent of work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and details which show size and location of members and type of concrete to be poured.

B. Furnish all labor, material and equipment necessary for and incidental to the completion of all concrete work. Concrete work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Formwork, complete with required shoring, re-shoring, temporary bracing and anchorage.

2. Concrete reinforcing including welded wire fabric, complete with required supports, spacers and related accessories.

3. Placing anchors, plates, and inserts required for attachment and/or support of structural and/or architectural precast concrete, structural steel or other materials and furnished under other specifications.

4. Cast-in-place concrete. 5. Finish and cure of floor slabs and toppings. 6. Grouting of elevator sills and leveling plates. 7. Vapor barrier and granular base below interior slabs-on-grade. 8. Grouting under base plates and bearing plates. 9. Miscellaneous concrete work such as equipment bases, splash pads, and under floor

duct encasement All as shown on M.E.P. Drawings. 10. Concrete inspection and testing. (Quality Assurance) 11. Expansion bolts in concrete. 12. Adhesive bolts in concrete. 13. Polystyrene Board Filler.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Division 2 - Excavation, Grading and Backfill.

B. Division 2 - Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks.

C. Division 2 - Paving and Surfacing: Concrete paving.

D. Division 3 - Drilled Concrete Piers.

E. Division 3 - Architectural Concrete Work.

F. Division 5 - Structural Steel: Furnishing anchor bolts and leveling plates for structural steel. Setting and grouting of base and bearing plates.

G. Division 5 - Miscellaneous Metals: Sleeves, anchors, inserts and other embedded items to be cast in concrete.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


H. Division 7 - Fluid Applied Waterproofing.

I. Division 15, Division 16: Coordinating sizes and locations of mechanical & electrical equipment pads and bases.

J. Division 15, Division 16: Providing and installing sleeves, inserts and anchors specified for mechanical and electrical items.

K. Division 15, Division 16: Concrete encasement of electrical conduits and site utilities.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. The Work under this section shall be subject to all applicable provisions of the state and local building and safety codes and other codes and standards referenced in this specification.

B. Comply with the American Concrete Institute "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete," ACI 301, unless amended or superceded by requirements of this section or General Notes on structural drawings.

C. In case of conflict among documents, including architectural and structural drawings and specifications, notify the Architect prior to submitting proposal. In case of conflict between the structural drawings and specifications, the strictest interpretation shall govern. All references shall be latest editions.

1. ACI 301 - Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 304 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 3. ACI 304 - Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 4. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compound for

Curing Concrete 7. ACI SP-15 - ACI Field Reference Manual: Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings with Selected ACI and ASTM References. Contractor shall provide at least one copy of this publication available in the field office all times.

8. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual. 9. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural

Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture. 10. ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact

with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. 11. "Manual of Standard Practice," Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), latest

edition.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers.

1. Inspection or testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible and shall bear the cost of correcting concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including, but not limited to, strength, tolerances, and finishes. Correct deficient concrete by means acceptable to the Architect. The cost of extra work incurred by the Architect to approve corrective work shall be borne by the Contractor.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Owner will engage a qualified Testing Agency, approved by the Architect and Engineer to perform tests and inspections required by these specifications. Testing Agency shall comply with ASTM E329 and shall furnish a certificate of compliance, signed by the Professional Engineer responsible for management of the Agency. The Professional Engineer must be registered in the state where the project is located. Testing and inspection include the following:

1. Inspect formwork, reinforcing and concrete in conformance with the special inspection requirements of the IBC. Keep records and submit reports indicated. a. Testing to verify the adequacy of work done without prior notice, or contrary to

standard construction practice. 2. Concrete testing will be performed in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301

and as modified below: a. Mold and cure five (5) specimens from each sample. b. Compressive strength tests: One set of specimens for each 100 cubic yards or

fraction thereof of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at seven (7) days, two specimens tested at 28 days, one at 56 days and one specimen held in reserve.

c. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is below 40 degrees F and each time a set of specimens is made.

d. Determine and report slump of each sample. 3. All concrete batch trip tickets will be collected and retained by the Contractor.

Compressive and slump tests shall be identified by reference to a particular trip ticket. Concrete batch trip tickets shall contain information specified in ASTM C94, Paragraph entitled "Batch Ticket Information". The ticket shall also clearly show the amount of water for the entire batch which may be added in the field that will not exceed the water cement ratio specified by the design mix. The Architect/Engineer and Contractor will be immediately notified of trip tickets not as specified herein. a. The Architect/Engineer and Contractor will be immediately notified when the

amount of water in a batch of concrete exceeds that allowed in the design mix. 4. Additional Tests for Concrete Work:

a. The Independent Testing Agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete work as directed by the Architect/Engineer when test results indicate that specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure. The Independent Testing Laboratory will conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42. Costs of such tests will be borne by the Owner if test results indicate conformance with the Contract Documents. Such tests indicating nonconformance with the Contract Documents will be paid for by the Contractor including additional architectural and engineering services made necessary by such nonconformance.

b. The strength of the structure in place will be considered to be potentially deficient if it fails to comply with any requirement which controls the strength of the structure.

c. The cost of any additional tests, including load tests and/or other nondestructive tests directed by the Architect/Engineer or conducted by the Contractor to prove the adequacy of the concrete work, shall be borne by the Contractor including additional architectural and engineering services made necessary by such tests.

d. Inspections or testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


5. Miscellaneous requirements: a. The Architect and Independent Testing Agency shall have uninterrupted access

to the ready-mix batching plant at all times that the work is in progress. b. Provide the Testing Agency with the following;

1) Incidental labor required to facilitate testing. 2) Minimum one day's advance notice when concrete is to be placed. 3) Storage facilities for concrete test cylinders. 4) Materials, samples, and access to materials as required for testing.

c. Reimbursement of costs for testing and inspection resulting as a consequence of the following: 1) Work not in compliance with the Contract Documents. 2) Testing requested by the Contractor or Subcontractor such as additional

cylinders for early breaks, etc. 3) Testing to verify the adequacy of work done without prior notice, or

contrary to standard construction practice. d. Record of Work: A record shall be kept by the General Contractor listing the

time and date of placement of all concrete for the structure. Such record shall be kept until the completion of the project and shall be available to the Architect/Engineer for examination at any time.

B. See Division 1, "Special Inspection."

C. Surveys:

1. The Owner will employ a licensed Surveyor to monitor as-built line and level conditions. Line and level surveys will be performed for each level before formwork is removed and immediately after formwork has been removed. a. Surveys shall report plan locations of all horizontal concrete edges and shall

report deviations from plumb for all concrete rises. Surveys shall also report actual elevations at each level at all columns and actual elevations at centerline of all bays before and after form removal.

b. Nonconforming work will be rejected. c. Owner's survey of as-built concrete structure shall in no way relieve Contractor

of responsibility to provide concrete work within specified tolerances capable of accepting all subsequent work.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, Mix Designs, and Samples in accordance with the following:

1. Submit electronic sets to the structural engineer of each shop drawing. Reproducible copies of contract documents shall not be used as shop drawings. Shop drawings shall be reviewed by Contractor prior to submission. Drawings shall bear Contractor's approval stamp accepting responsibility for coordination of dimensions shown in the contract documents, quantities and coordination with other trades. Drawings not bearing contractors stamp may be rejected at the discretion of the Architect or Structural Engineer. Electronic set will be returned with the structural Engineer’s comments. Allow 14 calendar days in the Structural Engineers office for review of shop drawings.

2. Provide electronic copy of mix design & product data. One copy will be returned following review by the Architect/Engineer.

B. Mix Designs


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


1. Submit substantiating data for each proposed concrete mix design to the Architect/Engineer not less than 3 weeks prior to first concrete placement. Data for each mix shall, as a minimum, include the following: a. Mix identification designation (unique for each mix submitted). b. Statement of intended use for mix. c. Mix proportions, including all admixtures used. d. Product data and/or certifications verifying conformance of all mix materials,

including admixtures, with specified requirements. e. Wet and dry unit weight. f. Entrained air content. g. Design slump. h. Required average strength qualification data per ACI 301 4.2.3.2 and 4.2.3.3

including back up test data. Submit separate qualification data for each production facility which will supply concrete to the project.

i. Field test data submitted under (h) above shall include copies of the Concrete Testing Agency's reports from which the data was compiled.

j. Submit one copy of a representative concrete batch trip ticket. 2. Separate design mixes are required for each strength and class of concrete, each

change in type and/or quantity of mix materials including admixtures, each change in slump limits, and each change in entrained air content.

3. For concrete placed by pumping, separate mix designs are required for each 100 feet of vertical or horizontal distance from the pump to the point of discharge. This requirement may be waived if evidence acceptable to the Architect is submitted demonstrating, by previous successful experience, that the proposed mix will meet all requirements of these specifications, when sampled at the point of discharge, over the full range of distances required.

C. Submit Product Data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials

and items including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, epoxies, grouts, dry-shake finish material, hardeners, sealers, water stops, joint systems and others as required by the Architect.

D. Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI Detailing Manual (SP 66). Provide 1/8"=1'-0" scale elevations of all walls with reinforcing shown. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structure. Include all accessories specified and required to support reinforcement. Obtain from General Contractor location of proposed constructions joints and indicate on the shop drawings.

E. Submit samples of concrete materials if requested by the Architect, including trade names, sources, and descriptions.

F. Submit curing compound product data and verification of its acceptable compatibility with type of concrete penetrating sealer and waterproofing and other subsequent architectural surface treatments.

G. Submit materials certificates, mill test reports, and materials laboratory test reports, if requested by the Architect, attesting that each material item complies with or exceeds the specified requirements.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size, and color.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


B. Storage of Materials: Store materials in unopened containers. Store off ground and under cover, protected from damage.

C. Reinforcing: Unload and store reinforcing bars so they will be kept free of mud. Store on wood skids while awaiting use.

D. Concrete: See "Production and Delivery of Concrete" section under PART 2 of these specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE FORMS

A. Form Materials: Comply with ACI 301 as supplemented and modified in this Section.

B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise specified, formwork for unexposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed with plywood, lumber, metal or other suitable material. Lumber shall be dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel Bars:

1. ASTM A615, Grade 60, except as noted otherwise on drawings. Welding reinforcing bars not permitted except where specifically indicated.

2. All reinforcing required to be welded shall conform to ASTM A-706, Grade 60.

B. Welded Wire Fabric: Mesh size and gauge as indicated on the Drawings. Conform to ASTM A185, plain in flat sheets. Finish: Plain.

C. Tie Wire: Tie wire shall be annealed steel tie wire, minimum 16 gauge.

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement in place, in accordance with the recommendations of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute as modified below.

1. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs for slab-on-grade.

2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces: Provide supports with legs plastic tipped, where legs of supports contact forms.

3. All materials that come in direct contact with epoxy coated bars, such as slab bolsters, high chairs, tie wires, etc., shall be plastic coated.

4. Provide accessories and supports for welded wire fabric and reinforcement in composite concrete slabs as required.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II or I/II. Use only one manufacturer and type of cement throughout the Project.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


1. Alkali Content: Maximum 0.6 percent, or certify that no alkali reactivity is produced with the proposed cement-aggregate combinations when tested in accordance with ASTM C227.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.

C. Aggregates: Provide aggregates in conformance to ACI 301 and ASTM C33. Provide aggregates from same source and supplier as used in the concrete mix design.

1. Pea Gravel: Washed clean, hard, rounded gravel conforming to ASTM C33 except graded for 90% passing the 3/8 inch screen and 90% retained on the 1/4 inch screen. Use pea gravel only when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.

D. Slag Cement: Slag cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM C989.

E. Water: Potable.

F. Admixtures.

1. General: a. Admixtures Containing Chloride Ions: Admixtures containing chloride ions shall

not be used. b. The maximum chloride ion content for corrosion protection in concrete at an

age of 28 days, contributed from ingredients including water, aggregates, cementitious materials and admixtures shall be as follows: 1) Reinforced concrete which may be exposed to chloride in service =

0.015% by weight of cement. 2) Reinforced concrete that will be dry or protected from moisture in service =

1.00% by weight of cement. 3) All other reinforced concrete = 0.30% by weight of cement.

c. The addition of calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.1% chloride ions is not permitted.

d. Certification: Written conformance to the specified requirements and the chloride ion content will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review by the Architect.

2. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A (water reducing-normal set), or Type D (water reducing and retarding admixture) containing no chloride ions added during manufacture. a. "Eucon WR-75" by the Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Plastocrete 161" by Sika Chemical Corporation. c. "Polyheed" by Master Builders.

3. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G (Super Plasticizer with retarder), containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. a. "Eucon 37" by the Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Sikament" by Sika Chemical Corporation. c. "Pozzolith 400-N" by Master Builders.

4. Nonchloride Accelerator Admixture: ASTM C494, Type C (Accelerating only) or E (Water and accelerating admixture) containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. a. "Accelguard 80" by the Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Daraccel" by W. R. Grace & Co. c. "Pozzolith-NC534" by Master Builders.

5. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. ACI 301 for all concrete used for vehicular traffic and parking or concrete permanently exposed to the weather.

2.4 NOT USED


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


2.5 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Pre-molded compressible joint fillers.

1. Fiber Joint Filler: Conform to ASTM D1751. See plans for location and thickness.

B. Embedded Items:

1. Embedded items shall not displace reinforcing bars. 2. Rated or specified capacity of embedded items shall not be construed as the design

capacity of the supporting concrete members. 3. Adjustable wedge insert: Malleable cast iron, complete with bolts, nuts, and washers;

3/4 inch bolt diameter unless otherwise shown. 4. Threaded inserts: Malleable cast iron with full depth bolts; 3/4 inch diameter unless

otherwise shown. 5. Steel Plates, Bars and Structural Shapes: Conform to ASTM A36. 6. Special use proprietary products proposed by the Contractor will be considered.

Submit test data, manufacturer's data, placement instructions, and other pertinent data for approval by the Architect.

2.6 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Provide premixed, non-shrink, noncorrosive, nonmetallic, non-staining product containing selected silica sands, Portland Cement, and water-reducing agents. The product shall require only the addition of water and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C-827.

1. Minimum compressive strength, when tested according to ASTM C-942 with manufacturer's maximum allowable water content: 3000 psi after one day; 7000 psi after 28 days.

2. Grout shall be free of gas-producing or air-releasing agents and oxidizing agents. 3. Grout shall contain no corrosive iron, aluminum, or gypsum. 4. Grout shall be placed at a fluid consistency and shall exhibit no visible bleeding two

hours after placement and totally non-shrink in 28 days in accordance with ASTM C-827 with manufacturer's maximum water content.

5. Do not vibrate the grout. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

a. Burke by Edoco "Burke Non-Ferrous Non-Shrink Grout" b. L&M Chemicals "Crystex" c. Euclid Chemical Company "NS Grout" d. Or approved equal

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Form Release Agent: Nox-crete form coating or equal product acceptable to the Architect/Engineer which will not impair the bonding characteristics of surface-applied materials.

B. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C-171:

1. Waterproof paper 2. Polyethylene film 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


D. Curing Compounds: Liquid-type, membrane-forming curing compound, conforming to

requirements of ASTM C309. Use Type I, Class A, compounds. Curing compounds should not be used on surfaces that are to receive additional concrete, paint, tile, or other material requiring a positive bond, unless the Contractor has demonstrated that the membrane can be satisfactorily removed before the subsequent application is made, or the membrane can serve satisfactorily as the base for the later application.

1. Super Floor Coat manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Co. 2. Dress and Seal manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

E. Bonding and Adhesive Compounds:

1. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate type, rewettable. a. Corr-Bond manufactured by Euclid Chemical Co. b. Everbond by L&M Construction Products, Inc.

2. Epoxy Products: Two component material suitable for use on dry or damp surface, complying with ASTM C-881, for use in all structural concrete repairs. a. Products for Crack Repair:

1) "Fx-751 Hydro-Ester Low Modulus LV"; Fox Industries 2) "Sikadur 35 Hi Mod LV"; Sika Corporation

b. Products for Epoxy Mortar Patches: 1) "FX-763 Low Modulus Hydro-Ester Trowel"; Fox Industries 2) "Sikadur 21 Lo-Mod LV"; Sika Corporation

c. Products for Epoxying Bolts or Reinforcing Steel into Concrete: 1) "Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel"; Sika Corporation

d. Products for Epoxying Steel Plates to Concrete: 1) "Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel"; Sika Corporation

e. Substitutions may be considered provided complete technical information and job references are furnished to the Architect/Engineer for approval prior to commencement of work.

F. Nonskid Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits or crushed emery, as

abrasive aggregate for nonslip finish with emery aggregate containing not less than 40% aluminum oxide and not less than 25% ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded, packaged, rustproof and non-glazing, and is unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials. Locations for nonskid finish per Architectural Drawings.

G. Curing and Hardening Compound: Sodium Silicate Compound. These products should

be used for remedial curing and hardening subject to review by the Architect/Engineer.

1. Eucocure Vox by Euclid Chemical Co. 2. Chem Hard by L&M Construction Chemicals

H. Expansion Bolts in Concrete:

1. ICBO Approval: Only concrete anchors approved by the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) with a published Research Report shall be approved for use.

2. Type: All expansion bolts in concrete shall be wedge type expansion bolts. a. Interior Use: All expansion bolts, nuts, and washers for use in interior

conditioned environments free of potential moisture shall be manufactured from carbon steel zinc plated in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z-325.

b. Exterior or Exposed Use: All expansion bolts, nuts, and washers for use in


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


exposed or potentially wet environments, or for attachment of exterior cladding materials, shall be galvanized or stainless steel. Stainless steel bolts shall be manufactured from 300 series stainless steel, and nuts and washers from 300 series or Type 18-8 stainless steel.

c. Nuts and Washers: Nuts and washers shall be furnished by the manufacturer and used with the bolts.

3. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers: a. "Kwik-Bolt" or "Super Kwik-Bolt"; Hilti b. "Rawlbolt"; The Rawlplug Co. c. "Trubolt"; ITW Ramset/Red Head d. Other manufacturers will be acceptable only if approved by ICBO with an ICBO

Research Report submitted for Engineer review.

I. Adhesive Bolts in Concrete:

1. Type: Adhesive bolts in concrete shall consist of a threaded steel rod meeting the minimum requirements of ASTM A307 and a sealed glass, tube or sausage type capsule containing polyester resin, quartz sand aggregate and a hardener. a. Interior Use: For use in environments free of potential moisture shall be

manufactured from carbon steel zinc plated in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z-325.

b. Exterior or Exposed Use: Adhesive bolts used in exterior, exposed, or potentially wet environments, and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, shall have threaded rods manufactured from ASTM A153 galvanized steel or 300 series stainless steel. Nuts and washers shall also be galvanized or stainless steel.

2. Nuts and Washers shall be furnished by the manufacturer and used with the bolts. 3. Acceptable Products:

a. "HVA Adhesive Anchor"; Hilti Fastening Systems b. Other manufacturers will be acceptable only if approved by ICBO with an ICBO

Research Report submitted for Engineer review.

J. Granular base below slabs on grade: clean well graded, free draining, crushed aggregate, free from all deleterious substances, including clay, dirt, lumps, organic topsoil, frozen material, etc.

K. Extruded Polystyrene Board Filler: Rigid cellular thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process complying with ASTM C578 for type indicated; CFC free and as follows:

1. Type IV, 1.6 lbs/cu. ft. minimum density, unless noted otherwise.

2.8 CONCRETE PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. Proportion ingredients and design concrete mixes in accordance with ACI 301 as modified in this Section.

B. Fly Ash: A maximum of 20% by weight of the cement may be replaced with fly ash at the ratio of one pound of fly ash for every one pound of cement removed.

C. Slag Cement: A maximum of 20% by weight of the cement may be replaced with slag cement at the ratio of one pound of slag cement for every pound of cement removed.

D. Durability:


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


1. All concrete exposed to exterior or the potential of freezing temperatures, including concrete paving, shall be air-entrained with 5% to 7% entrained and entrapped air.

2. All concrete subjected to deicers shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.40.

E. Admixtures:

1. All concrete shall contain water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer).

2. Hot weather conditions: When temperatures exceed 85 degrees F, and/or placing conditions require retardation of the setting time, the Architect/Engineer may require a change from water reducing admixture Type A (normal) admixture to Type D (retarding) formulation of the water-reducing admixture.

3. Cold weather conditions: Concrete for slabs placed when the temperature is below 50 degrees F, may include a noncorrosive accelerator conforming to ASTM C494, Type C or E. Manufacturer shall submit long-term test data proving the noncorrosive effects on galvanized steel deck and reinforcement before use. Submit certification from steel deck manufacturer that deck warranty is not affected by the use of the proposed accelerator.

4. When increased workability, pumpability, lower water-cement ratio, shrinkage and permeability reduction is required, superplasticizer admixture shall be used. The maximum slump shall be 8 inches after addition of the superplasticizer unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect.

F. Maximum slumps before addition of superplasticizer shall be as follows:

1. Pumped lightweight concrete 5-1/2". 2. Concrete for Drilled piers 5" – 8". 3. All other structural concrete 4".

G. Selection of Proportions of Ingredients:

1. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete used in the construction. Use an Independent Testing Laboratory acceptable to the Architect/Engineer for design, preparation and reporting proposed mix designs. a. Proportion mixes to obtain compressive strengths indicated on the Drawings. b. Where compressive strength is not indicated, assume minimum 4000 psi 28-

day strength. 2. Document that proposed mix designs will produce required average strength, fcr, by

one of the following: a. Method 1: Field test data. ACI 301, 4.2.3.4a except that field records shall be

for the same mix design proposed and interpolation between records is not allowed.

b. Method 2: Trial mixtures; ACI 301, 4.2.3.4b c. Method 3: Modify ACI 301, 4.2.3.4b as follows: Prepare at least 3 trial batches,

one each for slumps of 3", 5" and 6-1/2" (tolerance: minus 0", plus 1/2") with cement content held constant and variable quantities of water. Plot compression test results versus slump and water cement ratio. Select mix design with highest water content meeting required average strength, f'c. Adjust cement content, redesign and retest until contractor is satisfied with workability at required average strength, fcr.

d. Use Method 2 or 3 for mix designs with fly ash or lightweight aggregate. 3. The mix selected shall have the highest water content that will produce the specified

required strength plus 1200 psi. 4. Cement content and water may be modified by the Independent Testing Laboratory

in redesign and testing of the mix until the specified strength plus 1200 psi is


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


obtained with workability to satisfy the Contractor. 5. If the batch plant has adequate documentation acceptable to the Architect/Engineer

showing standard deviation in concrete strengths of less than 600 psi, the design strength of the mix may be reduced to less than 1200 psi over that called for on the Drawings per ACI 301.

6. Slag cement mix shall be designed in accordance with guidelines in ACI 233R-95. 7. Use materials from the same source from start to finish of Project unless changes

have been accepted by the Architect/Engineer. 8. Adjustment of Concrete Mixes: Concrete mix design adjustments may be requested

by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. a. Laboratory test reports for revised mix designs and strength results shall be

submitted to the Architect/Engineer and reviewed before use of revised concrete mixes in the Work.

2.9 FILLED STAIR TREADS AND LANDINGS

A. One (1) part cement to one (1) part sand to two (2) parts pea gravel, 3/8 inch maximum size.

2.10 PRODUCTION AND DELIVERY OF CONCRETE

A. Produce and deliver concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and as modified in this Section. Produce and deliver concrete during hot and cold weather in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 305 and ACI 306.

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete:

1. Concrete will be considered unacceptable if under any climatic conditions it undergoes initial set or if not deposited within 90 minutes of the time water is introduced, or before the drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first.

2. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter maximum discharge time is required. The concrete will be considered unacceptable if not deposited within 75 minutes after the introduction of mixing water to the cement or aggregate or the introduction of cement to the aggregate, or before 125 mixing speed revolutions when air temperature is between 80 degrees F and 90 degrees F, and within 60 minutes or before 100 mixing speed revolutions when air temperature is above 90 degrees F.

3. Just prior to discharging concrete, mix each load of concrete a minimum of 70 revolutions of mixer drum at full mixing speed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Perform work in accordance with the International Building Code and other applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Perform concrete work in accordance with "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete," ACI 301, as modified in this Section.

C. Granular material below slabs on grade: Compact to 98% of maximum dry density per ASTM D698. Spread in even layers and compact with rolling equipment.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


3.2 FORMWORK

A. Design, construct, brace and maintain formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and the recommendations of ACI 347 as modified in this Section.

B. Preparation of Form Surfaces:

1. Clean reused forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms to acceptable surface condition.

2. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed.

3. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's instructions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

4. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust stained steel formwork is not acceptable.

C. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on the Drawings or,

if not shown on Drawings, located so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1. Provide 1-1/2" minimum depth continuous keyways at all construction joints lacking continuous reinforcing through the joint and as shown on the Drawings. Preformed metal keyways or wood fabrications are acceptable.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints (without dowels) in slabs-on-

ground at points of contact between slabs-on-ground and vertical surfaces only where specifically detailed on the drawings. Provide construction joints with dowels at all locations unless isolation joints are detailed.

1. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified elsewhere in these specifications.

E. Control (Contraction) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct control joints in slabs on grade using pre-molded key joints, inserts, tooled joints or saw cuts with a minimum depth of one inch . Do not use saw cuts for exterior concrete work.

1. Where control joint spacing is not indicated on the Drawings, space joints at maximum 15 feet.

2. If pre-molded hardboard or fiberboard strips are used, insert the pre-molded hardboard or fiberboard strip into the fresh concrete until the top surface of the strip is flush with the slab surface. Remove insert strip and clean formed groove of loose debris after concrete has cured.

3. Prefabricated, strippable plastic joints may be used at Contractor's option. 4. Control joints may be saw cut. Cutting should commence before drying or cooling

causes random cracking. Cut sawed joints as soon as the surface is dry to the touch and the cut does not spall or un-ravel, but no later than 8 hours after concrete placement.

5. Maximum spacing of construction joint for slabs-on-grade: No limit. Joint sealant material if required is specified elsewhere in these specifications.

F. Provide blocking and shoring as required to prevent deformation and damage to steel

deck [and steel slab forms] during placement and curing of concrete fill. Locate C.J. where acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


G. Miscellaneous:

1. Chamfer Strips (ACI 303): Install 45 degree chamfer strips at exposed outside corners.

2. Rustication Strips: Securely nail within the forms using finish nails.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Reinforcing Steel:

1. Install reinforcing in proper position according to the tolerances given in ACI 301. 2. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. 3. Handling of epoxy-coated bars: All systems for handling coated bars shall have

padded contact areas. All bundling bands shall be padded. 4. Reinforcement partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as

shown on the drawings or specifically permitted by the Architect/Engineer.

B. Other Embedded Items:

1. Coordinate work with requirements of mechanical and electrical installations and accommodations. Do not install sleeves in any concrete slabs, beams, walls, or columns except where shown on the drawings or upon written approval by the Architect/Engineer.

2. Cooperate and coordinate the requirements for installation of embedded items specified and furnished in other sections of the specifications. Obtain templates and instructions for setting embedded items.

3. Anchors, Inserts, Block-outs, Anchor bolts, and other items built into the concrete shall be securely fastened to formwork or held in place with appropriate devices. Insertion into concrete after pouring will not be allowed.

4. Dovetail Slots: Install in formwork whenever masonry abuts concrete such as brick ledges, or surfaces to receive masonry veneer, intersections of masonry walls with concrete walls or columns. See Division 4 for requirements.

5. Tolerance for anchor bolts and other embedded items: a. 1/8-inch center-to-center of any two bolts within an anchor bolt group where an

anchor bolt group is defined as the set of anchor bolts which receive a single fabricated steel shipping piece.

b. 1/4-inch center-to-center of adjacent anchor bolt groups. c. Maximum accumulation of 1/4-inch per hundred feet along the established

column line of multiple anchor bolt groups, but not to exceed a total of 1 inch, where the established column line is the actual field line most representative of the centers of the as-built anchor bolt groups along line of columns.

d. 1/4-inch from the center of any anchor bolt group to the established column line through that group.

e. Unless shown otherwise, anchor bolts are set perpendicular to the theoretical bearing surface.

f. Other embedded items or connection material furnished by others for embedment in concrete shall be set in accordance with the tolerance requirements of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

6. Tolerance for embedded plates required to support precast members: a. Vertical location 1/2" b. Horizontal location 3/4" c. Plates must be securely attached to the forms to ensure they will not move

during concrete placing operations.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


C. Vapor Barrier: Install over prepared base material at slabs-on-grade.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Pre-placement Inspection: Inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Do not place concrete until the Work has been reviewed by the Owner's Testing Agency

B. Miscellaneous:

1. Do not place concrete in free-standing water, over ice, or on frozen subgrade. 2. Twenty-four hours must elapse between adjacent slab and wall placement. Columns

and walls must reach an initial set (minimum three (3) hours curing) before framing supported thereon is placed.

C. Conveying:

1. Convey concrete from the mixer to point of deposit without segregation and so as to maintain continuous plastic flow at delivery and until the casting unit is complete.

D. Placing: Comply with ACI 301 and 304 as modified in this section.

1. Wet exposed subgrade, masonry filler units, precast concrete, previously placed concrete, and uncoated wood forms immediately prior to placing concrete (except during freezing temperatures).

2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final location to avoid segregation.

3. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

4. Guide the flow of concrete in walls and columns for vertical drop between the reinforcing. Free fall, except in walls and columns, shall not exceed 5 feet. Free fall in walls and columns shall not exceed 15 feet.

5. Continuous intermediate screed strips set prior to concrete placement are required for slabs cast over steel deck, place screeds along beam lines. Set screeds and adjust as necessary to achieve proper slab elevation and thickness, allowing for beam camber and deflection.

6. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.

7. Environmental Requirements: a. Cold Weather Placement: When depositing concrete after the first frost or when

the mean daily temperatures are below 40 degrees F., follow recommendations of ACI 306. Provide sufficient protection material in advance of the time when daily mean temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F. Provide strong and secure weather protection around the building for at least one story above and one story below the floor being concreted to allow the floor to maintain temperatures between 50 and 70 degrees F. for not less than 72 hours after depositing. Obtain one (1) temperature reading of air at floor level for each 600 square feet of floor area just prior to concreting, and provide additional heat should the measured temperature be less than 50 degrees F.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


Record and submit temperature readings for Architect/Engineer review no later than 24 hours after concreting. 1) The specified non-chloride accelerator or high-early strength Type III

cement may be used when approved by the Architect/Engineer. Do not place concrete without approval of the Architect/Engineer on days when temperature at 9:00 a.m. is below 30 degrees F. Job-cured cylinders for verification of strength and/or the adequacy of the Contractor's protective methods may be required by the Architect/Engineer.

b. Hot Weather Placement: When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow recommendations of ACI 305. The temperature of concrete at time of placement shall not exceed 90 degrees F. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible. When the air temperature is expected to exceed 90 degrees F., the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Architect/Engineer of the procedures to be used in protecting, depositing, finishing, and curing the concrete. The specified water reducing retarding admixture may be used upon approval of the Architect/Engineer. The use of continuous wetting or fog sprays may be required by the Architect/Engineer for 24 hours after depositing or the work may be restricted to evenings or nights, especially in times of low humidity.

E. Consolidating:

1. Maintain one standby vibrator for every three vibrators used. 2. Consolidate placed concrete by internal vibrating equipment with a minimum

frequency of 7000 rpm, supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.

4. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

3.5 FINISHES

A. Unspecified form finishes. If the finish is not designated in the contract documents the following finishes shall be used as applicable.

1. Rough Form Finish: For all concrete surfaces NOT exposed to public view. 2. Smooth Form Finish: For all concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

B. Finish of Formed Surfaces:

1. Rough Form Finish: Provide rough form finish for formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work and in parking garages unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off.

2. Smooth Form Finish: Provide smooth form finish for formed concrete surfaces exposed to view (except parking garage, unless noted otherwise), or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, damp-proofing, painting or other


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


similar system. This is as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed.

3. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after form removal. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

4. Grout Cleaned Finish: Provide grout cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces which have received smooth form finish treatment. a. Combine one part Portland Cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and mix

with water to consistency of thick paint. Proprietary additives may be used at Contractor's option. Blend standard Portland Cement and white Portland Cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that final color of dry grout will closely match adjacent surfaces.

b. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing.

5. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Exposed Ceilings: Where the underside of horizontal concrete surfaces remain as the ceiling of occupied or usable space at stairways, exercise exceptional care in the selection, installation, alignment, and removal of formwork to produce a clean, smooth surface. Tape all form joints. Remove all form oil at area to be covered before applying tape.

C. Unspecified Slab Finishes: When type of finish is not specified in the contract documents,

the following finishes shall be used as applicable.

1. Scratched Finish: For surfaces intended to receive bonded application cementitious toppings or other applications.

2. Floated Finish: For surfaces intended to receive roofing, waterproofing membranes, or sand bed terrazzo.

3. Troweled Finish: For floors intended as walking surfaces or for reception of floor coverings.

4. Broom or Belt Finish: For sidewalks and garage floors and ramps. 5. Non-Slip: For exterior platforms, steps, and landings; and for exterior and interior

pedestrian ramps.

D. Monolithic Slab Finishes:

1. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, Portland Cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. Finish surfaces to tolerance specified below. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.

2. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as herein after specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo, and as otherwise indicated. Do not work surface until ready for floating.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance as specified below. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

3. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin-film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a level surface to a tolerance as specified below. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

4. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified above, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming.

5. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to garage floors and ramps with less than 6% slope, exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

6. Rake Finish: Provide a rake finish to all ramps exceeding a 6% slope. Finish shall be applied perpendicular to direction of traffic.

7. Chemical-Hardener Finish: Apply chemical-hardener finish to interior concrete floors where indicated. Evenly apply each coat, and allow 24 hours for drying between coats Apply proprietary chemical hardeners in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. After final coat of chemical-hardener solution is applied and dried, remove surplus hardener.

8. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Apply nonslip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads, platforms, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated on the Architect's Drawings After completion of float finishing, and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 lbs. of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein specified After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to expose nonslip aggregate.

9. Traffic Surfaces in Parking Facility: a. Begin floating after bleeding of water through surface of concrete has been

completed and water sheen has disappeared from concrete surface. Finish slab surfaces using a wood/magnesium float to achieve a rough swirl texture.

b. Finish to tolerance per paragraph "Finishes" of these specifications. c. Finish concrete slabs to proper elevations to ensure surface moisture will drain

freely to floor drains.

3.6 CONCRETE FINISH MEASUREMENT AND TOLERANCES

A. Extra concrete: The contractor shall include in his bid any additional concrete required to achieve the specified slab surface finish tolerance. This includes extra concrete required to accommodate for the deflection of composite slabs on deck. Final concrete thickness for composite slabs on deck shall be that shown on plans as a minimum with additional concrete poured to achieve the following tolerances.

B. Concrete floor finish tolerances:


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


1. Class AA: Depressions between high spots shall not exceed 1/8" under a 10' straight edge.

2. Class AX: Depressions between high spots shall not exceed 3/16" under a 10' straight edge.

3. Class BX: Depressions between high spots shall not exceed 5/16" under a 10' straight edge.

4. Class CX: Depressions between high spots shall not exceed 1/2" under a 10' straight edge.

C. Slab finishes and specified tolerance classes.

1. Scratch finish: Class CX tolerance. 2. Floated finish: Class BX tolerance. 3. Troweled finish: Class AX tolerance. 4. Exposed aggregate finish: Class BX tolerance.

D. Slab Elevations:

1. Slabs on grade: Within 1/2 inch of the elevation shown on drawings. 2. Supported slabs: Within 1/2 inch of the elevation shown on drawings.

3.7 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of concrete. Curing shall commence as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. The curing period shall be 7 days for all concrete except high-early strength concrete which shall be cured for 3 days minimum. Curing shall be in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the curing period.

B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moisture curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, by curing compound, or by combinations thereof, as herein specified. The Contractor shall choose a curing method that is compatible with the requirements for subsequent material application on the concrete surface.

1. Provide moisture curing by one of the following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly

saturating cover with water and keeping it continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete,

placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Provide curing compound to interior slabs with resilient flooring, carpet over cushion, or left exposed; and to exterior slabs, walks and curbs as follows: a. Apply specified curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing

operations are complete (within 30 minutes). Apply to underside of slabs following removal of forms.

b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


with manufacturer's directions. c. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. d. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. e. Before using membrane curing compound on surfaces that are to be covered

with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, damp-proofing, membrane roofing, flooring (such as ceramic or quarry tile, glue-down carpet), painting, and other coatings and finish materials, demonstrate that the membrane can be satisfactorily removed before the subsequent application is made, or the membrane can serve satisfactorily as the base for the later application.

C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Where wooden forms are used, cure formed concrete surfaces,

including undersides of beams, underside of supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed.

1. When forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and

other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing method.

1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.

E. During hot and cold weather, cure concrete in accordance with ACI 305 and ACI 306.

3.8 REPAIR OF FORMED SURFACE DEFECTS

A. Allow Architect/Engineer to observe concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.

B. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details, and elevations.

C. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Patch, repair, or replace exposed finished concrete as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

D. Patching of tie holes is not required unless exposed in final condition.

E. Repair defects in structural concrete elements as follows:

1. Deep Defects Exposing Reinforcing: Chip to sound concrete and clean thoroughly to remove all loose concrete and dust. Apply thin coat of specified epoxy adhesive. Form and pour, or dry pack with specified nonmetallic, non-shrink grout, prior to development of tack-free condition of epoxy bonder. Strip forms after grout has hardened and provide specified finish. Moist cure or apply specified clear curing and sealing compound immediately after finishing.

2. Defects Greater Than 1/2 In. Depth not Exposing Reinforcing: Chip, clean and apply specified epoxy adhesive. Dry pack using specified nonmetallic, non-shrink grout prior to development of tack-free condition of epoxy bonder. Provide specified finish and cure.

3. Defects Less Than 1/2 In. Depth and Tie Holes: a. For concrete having a specified compressive strength of 5000 psi or less: Chip

and clean per paragraph in this section. Dry pack per paragraph in this section. Finish and cure as required.


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


b. For concrete having a specified compressive strength greater than 5000 psi: Chip and clean per paragraph in this section. At Contractor's option, dampen surface and apply Sikatop Non-sag Mortar, or equivalent, followed by specified finish (no curing required); or apply thin coat of the specified bonding compound followed by dry pack per paragraph in this section. Finish and cure as required.

4. Other equivalent repair procedures may be used subject to review and acceptance by the Architect/Engineer.

3.9 REPAIR OF UNFORMED SURFACE DEFECTS

A. Defects which adversely affect the durability of the concrete or finish. Unacceptable surface defects shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide, or which penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced concrete, regardless of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets and other objectionable conditions.

B. Cracks larger than 0.01" wide shall be filled with epoxy injection or other patching system acceptable to the Architect / Structural Engineer.

C. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.

D. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after, completion of surfaces, finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete surfaces.

E. Proprietary concrete patching compounds may be used, when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.

3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SHORES, RESHORING

A. Removal of Forms: (Supplement and Modify ACI 301 as follows):

1. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete such as sides of beams, walls, columns and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours after placing the concrete provided the concrete is sufficiently cured to be undamaged by form removal operations and provided that supplementary curing and protection is provided for the exposed concrete.

2. Formwork supporting weight of concrete such as beam soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements shall not be removed until concrete has attained 75% of design strength at 28 days. a. Form removal time may be altered if a reshoring program is used that is

acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. b. In place compressive strength of cast-in-place concrete shall be determined by

testing field-cured concrete specimens representative of that concrete. 1) Field-cured concrete specimens (as required by the Contractor for early

form removal) shall be made and tested by the Owner's testing facility and paid for by the Contractor.

3. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been designed and arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.

B. Reshoring: (Supplement and Modify ACI 301 as follows):

1. Remove forms and re-shore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to safely support the work without excessive stress or deflection at time of form removal. a. Reshoring is defined as follows: Strip several entire bays. Allow slab to deflect.

Install reshores. Structure carries its own self weight. No initial load in reshores.

2. A minimum of two (2) levels of reshores in addition to the level of formwork is required to support one level of newly poured concrete.

3. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, and longer if required until the concrete has attained its required 28-day strength and until heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed.

3.11 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Grout column base plates, equipment bases and other locations noted on the Drawings with non-shrink grout.

B. Perform all grouting in accordance with recommendations of ACI and the grout manufacturer's printed specifications for site preparation, product mixing and placing.

C. Drypack: Zero slump, cement-sand mix, proportion determined by trial to produce 7000 psi compressive strength at 28 days.

3.12 TOLERANCES

A. TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES

1. Variation from plumb: a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and in arrises:

1) In any 10 ft. of length 1/4 in. 2) Maximum for the entire length 1 in.

b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves, and other conspicuous lines: 1) In any 20 ft. length 1/4 in. 2) Maximum for the entire length 1/2 in.

2. Variation from the level or from the grades specified in the contract documents: a. In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffits, and in arrises, measured before removal of

supporting shores: 1) In any 10 ft of length 1/4 in. 2) In any bay or in any 20 ft. length 3/8 in. 3) Maximum for the entire length 3/4 in.

b. In exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines: 1) In any bay or in 20 ft. length 1/4 in. 2) Maximum for the entire length 1/2 in.

3. Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls, and partitions: a. In any bay 1/2 in. b. In any 20 ft. of length 1/2 in. c. Maximum for the entire length 1 in.

4. Variation in the sizes and location of sleeves, floor openings, and wall openings, +1/4 in.

5. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in the thickness of slabs and walls: a. Minus 1/4 in., plus 1/2 in.

6. Footings


Addendum 4

11/12/2014


a. Variations in dimensions in plan: Minus 1/2 in, plus 2 in. b. Misplacement or eccentricity: 2 percent of the footing width in the direction of

misplacement but not more than 2 in. c. Thickness:

1) Decrease in specified thickness: 5 percent 2) Increase in specified thickness: No limit

7. Variation in steps: a. In a flight of stairs: Rise +1/8 in. Tread +1/4 in. b. In consecutive steps: Rise +1/16 in. Tread +1/8 in.

1) Tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of vertical reinforcing steel, dowels, or embedded items.

3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS

A. All other concrete work indicated on the drawings shall be provided and installed in conformance to these specifications:

1. Equipment Bases: Install concrete bases for all pumps, boilers, tanks, fans, transformers, floor mounted electrical equipment, etc., including anchor bolts and inserts in accordance with setting diagrams furnished by the Contractor responsible for installing the equipment. Finish all bases in a workmanlike manner with a troweled finish. The bases shall be located and sizes determined by the Contractor furnishing the equipment.

2. Concrete Benches and Planters: Form and pour in place all exterior concrete benches and planters as indicated. Reinforce as detailed. Finish bench tops with smooth troweled finish and slope slightly for drainage.

3. Light Pole Bases: Form, reinforce, and pour light pole bases as indicated on electrical drawings. Coordinate installation of conduit and anchor bolts with electrical contractor.

4. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.

5. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

END OF SECTION


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

MASONRY VENEER 04 2613 - 1

SECTION 04 2613 - MASONRY VENEER

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Decorative concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar. 3. Ties and anchors. 4. Embedded flashing. 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:

1. Steel lintels in masonry veneer.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Standard library details will be rejected. Provide drawings and details showing actual project conditions for the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special

applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Decorative CMUs, in the form of small-scale units. 2. Colored mortar.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3. Weep holes/vents.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Decorative CMUs. 2. Standard gray mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to

be used on Project. 3. Weep holes and vents. 4. Accessories embedded in masonry.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include data on material properties.

2. Integral water repellant used in decorative CMUs. 3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 4. Mortar admixtures. 5. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients. 6. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.

D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.

a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.

b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of veneer, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down face of veneer, and hold cover securely in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with

painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain

from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units.

1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514/E 514M as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) ACM Chemistries; RainBloc.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=9954&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456950721&mf=&src=wd


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2) BASF Corporation, Construction Chemicals; Rheopel Plus. 3) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.;

Dry-Block. 4) .

C. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Basalite Concrete Products, LLC; Concrete Masonry Units. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal

dimensions.

a. 3 5/8" x 7 5/8" x 15 5/8" b. 3 5/8" x 3 5/8" x 15 5/8"

4. Pattern and Texture:

a. Standard pattern, ground-face finish. b. Standard pattern,split-face finish.

5. Colors: 5609WR. 6. Window Sill: Provide solid CMU sill as shown on drawings.

2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Corporation, Construction Chemicals; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar

Admixture.

E. Water: Potable.









Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

C. Anchors for Connecting to CMU: Provide anchors that embed in the CMU backup.

1. Ladder Type 2. Fabricate wire ladders from 9 gauge diameter side rods x 9 gauge diameter

cross rods, hot-dip galvanized carbon-steel wire.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; 240 Ladder-Twin Mesh

C.D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a corrosion-resistant, self-drilling, eye-screw designed to receive wire tie. Eye-screw has spacer that seats directly against framing and is same thickness as sheathing and has gasketed washer head that covers hole in sheathing.


1) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; Pos-I-Tie. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; 2-Seal Tie. 3) Wire-Bond; SureTie.

2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.019 (26 ga.) inch thick.

2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.

3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

4. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel to shapes indicated. 5. Solder metal items at corners.






Addendum #4

11/12/2014


B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use

metal flashing. 3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face,

use metal flashing with a drip edge. 4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing.

C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:

1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn96, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and remain watertight.

D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.

B. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Cellular Plastic Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polystyrene..


1) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 367 Core/Cavity Vent Weep System.

2) Masonry Technology Inc.; No. CV5010 Cavity Weep.

C. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; Weep-Thru Mortar Deflector. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Mortar Trap. c. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

2. Configuration: Provide one of the following:








Addendum #4

11/12/2014


a. Strips, not less than 2 inches thick and 10 inches high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar.

2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.9 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 3. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Use Type N unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.

D. Standard gray motar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.






Addendum #4

11/12/2014


B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.

5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Laymasonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

B. Lay CMUs with face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. At starting course, fully bed entire units, including area under cells.

1. At anchors and ties, fully bed units and fill cells with mortar as needed to fully embed anchors and ties in mortar.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3.6 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties

up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16

inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter.

B. Provide not less than 1-3/4 inches of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of insulation.

1. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace.

3.7 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form expansion joints as follows:

1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than

3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an airspace or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch.

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.8 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3.9 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep vents in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape.

2. Extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under water-resistive barrier, lapping at least 4 inches.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

C. Install weep vents in veneers in above embedded flashing.

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.

D. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

C. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

D. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for compressive strength.

3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

END OF SECTION 04 2613


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 07 4213.13 - 1

SECTION 07 4213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.



1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.

5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels.

6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during and after installation.

8. Review of procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and

furnish copy of record to each participant.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


B. Shop Drawings: Drawings shall represent actual job conditions. Manufacturer's standard catalog details will be rejected.

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: Provide color samples of selected color. Samples shall involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.

1. Metal Panels: 24 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories.

2. Flashings and trim: 24 inches long by actual width.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical metal panel assembly , including corner, soffits, supports, attachments, and accessories.

2. Water-Spray Test: Conduct water-spray test of metal panel assembly mockup, testing for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



Addendum #4

11/12/2014



A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 15.0 lbf/sq. ft..

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Reveal-Joint, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels : Formed with vertical panel edges and between panel edges; with narrow reveal joint between panels.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Firestone Metal Products, Delta Series, Panel Profile CFP-16B and CFP-16F or comparable product by one of the following:

a. ATAS International, Inc. b. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. c. Morin; a Kingspan Group company. d. Berridge Manufacturing Company.






Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch. b. Exterior Finish: Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 . c. Color:

1) Regal Red 2) Charcoal Gray 3) Slate Gray

3. Panel Coverage: 16 inches. 4. Panel Height: 0.875 inches. 5. Gauge: 22 6. Clipless Installation: The panels shall have an interlocking side lap feature which

conceals the fasteners requiring no panel clips. Load span tables must include evaluation of side joint interaction.

7. Panel Fasteners: Exposed panel fasteners are unacceptable. 8. Texture: Panels shall be smooth.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fascia, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fascia, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping non-crossive screws designed to withstand design loads.

1. Fasteners Material: Cadmium plated carbon steel or series 300 stainless steel with bonded neoprene washers.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2. Fastener Type, Size, Spacing: Engineered according to specific project conditions.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Non-Skinning Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 734 Non-hardening, non-drying, non-oxidizing butyl rubber-based sealant.

3. Hidden Joint Sealant: ASTM C 90; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class and use classifications required to seal joints in metal wall panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacture.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

E. Tolerances:


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


1. Form panels in longest practical lengths, true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distribution or manufacturing defects.

2. Bend lines, breaks, and angles shall be sharp and true, and surfaces shall be free from warp or buckle.

F. Coil Run: Ensure that entire project is manufactured single color coil paint run to ensure color uniformity.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Steel Panels and Accessories:

1. Coating: Spray-applied fluorocarbon resin utilizing 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resins.

2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.

a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping

screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.

3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel

splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping

screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.

8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels.

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.

E. Watertight Installation:


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.

2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).


A. Testing Agency: a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Water-Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly as directed by Architect for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories.

D. Remove and replace metal wall panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 07 4213.13


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 1

SECTION 07 5423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Mechanically fastened thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system. 2. Roof insulation.

B. Section includes the installation of insulation strips in ribs of roof deck. Insulation strips are furnished under Section 05 3100 "Steel Decking."

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking; and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.

2. Section 06 1600 "Sheathing" for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels. 3. Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck. 4. Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and

counterflashings. 5. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint

preparation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Do not schedule meeting until all submittals have been approved.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after

installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

B. CONTINUITY OF COMMAND AND CONTROL

1. The success of this project is dependent on the installer’s supervision of his own workforce, his knowledge of his roofing system and his part on the team charged with completing the work. The installer’s foreman must be able to read and understand these specifications, the plans and the details. He/she must be able to communicate with the construction manager, quality control team and his own workforce.

2. The installer’s foreman will attend weekly meetings with the construction manager and the other trades charged with representing the roofing membrane installation firm in the ongoing interface with the other trades. No work will be done on the roof without the foreman on site to direct and control the work. The foreman shall not be replaced without the approval of the construction manager and the Architect. Any replacement nominated to replace the foreman shall be directly supervised by management personnel, such as the off-site project manager. The new foreman must demonstrate his knowledge and skill to the construction manager and the Architect before left to independently direct the work.



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including:

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roofing,

fastening spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing. 4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. 5. Provide drawings that represent actual project conditions. Manufacturer's

standard catalog details will be rejected.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing, of color required. 2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014



A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is and FM Global approved for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014



A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Nothing in the Warranty document shall restrict access to other legal remedies under Colorado or Federal laws.

2. Special warranty includes roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners,cover boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, and other components of roofing system.

3. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Special endorsements for wind speed up to 70 mph and moderate hail coverage

are required.

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by Firestone Building Products, or comparable products by, but not limited to, one of the following:

1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

2. Johns Manville.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing .


A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure





Addendum #4

11/12/2014


due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. FM Global Listing: Roofing, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with requirements in FM Global 4450 or FM Global 4470 as part of a built-up roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Global's "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 2. Hail-Resistance Rating: MH.

D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.3 TPO ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform, flexible fabric-backed TPO sheet.

1. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 2. Exposed Face Color: White.

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.

D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


E. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.

F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Sheathing.

b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck.

c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure

Sheathing.

d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof deck.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDER

A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

1. Vapor retarder will be penetrated by thousands of fasteners used to secure the insulation to the steel deck. The contractor is required to fill every drilled hole with a fastener to preserve the permanace rating.

2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FM Global approved for vapor-retarder application.

2.7 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Global-approved roof insulation.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by







Addendum #4

11/12/2014


one of the following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

b. Firestone Building Products.

c. Johns Manville.

C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 3/8 inch per 12 inches (1:48) unless otherwise indicated. Provide tapered polyisocyanurate six inch wide edge strips at the valley lines that slope from zero to 1/2 inch thick as required to transition from the crickets’ 1/2 inch minimum edge thickness to the intersecting plane of typical polyisocyanurate substrate. The net slope shall be 1/4 inch per foot when measured perpendicular to the structural sloped fall line.

D. Provide preformed sump and valley panels, saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with roofing.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

1. Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.

D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 5/8 inch thick.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Sheathing.

b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck.

c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure

Sheathing.

d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board.

2.9 WALKWAYS

A. Walkway Traffic Pads:

1. EPDM 30 by 30 inches non-slip textured factory formed units as approved by the roof system manufacturer.










Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2. Fully adhere to the 60 mil TPO field sheet with 1 inch gaps between edges. Do not cover membrane lap spliced field seams

3. Install from roof access ladder to each rooftop HVAC unit. Install below the fall line at the eaves of standing seam metal roofing system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Section 05 3100 "Steel Decking."

4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has passed.

5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

6. Verify that concrete-curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck have been removed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.

1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM Global's "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Continuously seal side and end laps with adhesive.

B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into roofing system.

3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

E. NO trimming of surface insulation at roof drains. Provide pre-fabricated sump insulation so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. See tapered sump drawings that illustrate the transition from typical insulation substrate to the roof drain body clamping flange.

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. 2. Gaps in the insulation are not permitted at tapered sumps. Use pre-manufactured

sump panels or pre-manufactured valley panels with seamless miter cuts.

G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation:

1. Loose lay first and intermediate layers of insulation over the vapor retarder membrane. Install the last layer of insulation to deck over the base layer and intermediate layers of insulation using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to the steel deck.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together, fasten to roof deck, and secure to the last layer of insulation with ribbons of low rise urethane foam adhesive spaced as required to meet the FM-1-90 wind uplift in the field. Enhance ribbon spacing to resist higher wind loads at the edges and corners per FM-1-29.

1. Fasten cover boards according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

I. The installer shall verify the net slope to the drains meets the 1/4 inch per 12 inch minimum slope to the drains or scuppers. Utilize a four foot long carpenter’s spirit level with a wood wedge taped to the bottom sloping from one inch block at one end to zero at the other end to double check questionable pitches. Do not install membrane over cover board that will result in ponded water. Any defect that results in water ponded on the roof that does not evaporate within 48 hours will be cause for rejection. Any remedial action required to correct such defect will be at the installer’s expense.

3.7 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.

B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Lay out the lapped seams of the first roll of membrane field sheet starting at the parapet. DO not allow lapped seams of splices in the 8'-0" x 8'-0" roof sump or across the clamping flange of the roof drain or companion overflow roof drain body.

D. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

E. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to completely out-gas volatile organic compounds before installing roofing. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing.

F. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

G. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

H. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.

I. Spread water block sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clamping ring.

J. Apply a redundant six inch wide strip of 55 mil TPO adhered membrane over each 60 mil TPO field sheet splice.

3.8 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to completely out-gas volatile organic compounds before installing roofing. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners where possible and field-formed inside and outside corners, or with cured or uncured sheet flashing only when standard shapes won't work.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.

3.9 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Walkway Traffic Pads: Install walkway traffic pads according to manufacturer's written instructions in locations indicated, to form walkways. Leave 3 inches of space between adjacent walkway traffic pads. Do not cover membrane splices


A. The installer and the CM-GC are responsible for overall field Quality Control. (QC) Owner has engaged the Architect to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish Quality Assurance (QA) reports to CM-GC.

B. Flood test each roof drain when the assembly is complete. The installer and the projects plumbing contractor shall install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. Fill the sump area until water rises to the overflow drain clamping flange flow line. Observe the drain body from below for fifteen minutes. Check for any sign of failure. If no leaks are observed, pull the plug and observe the storm drains below for any signs of leaks. Check the rate of discharge through the roof drain body to confirm full function and capacity of the roof drain assembly. Any indication of reduced capacity will require power cleaning the storm drain lines and a re-test.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of base flashing.

C. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

D. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

E. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.

3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

D. Other trades may be required to work on, or above this finished product. Coordinate any and all protective measures required to preserve, protect and defend your work. Patches or fractional roll width over-lay strips will not be acceptable methods of procedure for remedial action. Any damage will be justification for removal of an entire roof plane. Any method of procedure to correct damage must be approved by the Architect.

E. Provide 100 square feet of 45 mil thick peel & stick TPO single ply membrane along with cleaning supplies and a hand held roller used to laminate a patch to the TPO membrane. These products are to be held in the Owners care and custody for emergency temporary repairs. The installer will conduct an in-service training program for the Owner’s Maintenance Department to instruct the staff on procedures for finding the source of leaks and installing patches needed to protect the space below until the installer can arrive to make such repairs as are enumerated in paragraph 3.12 below:

3.12 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY

A. WHEREAS _______________________________ of ___________________________, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. 2. Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: _________________. 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. 8. Expiration Date: __________________.

B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,

C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.

D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by:

a. lightning; b. peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert mph>; c. fire; d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement,

excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,

equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;

f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors,

maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner.

2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.

3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work.

4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty.

6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.

7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.

E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of ___________________, ________________.

1. Authorized Signature: _______________________________________. 2. Name: ______________________________________. 3. Title: _______________________________________.



Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 1

SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for windows doors interior borrowed lites storefront framing and glazed entrances.

2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 3. Section 08 4113 " Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts" 4. Section 08 1113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for lites in hollow metal doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.






Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 2

B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches square.

1. Laminated glass. 2. Insulating glass. 3. Fire rating glass. 4. Colored interlayer laminated glass.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-E coatings.

B. Product Certificates: For glass.

C. Product Test Reports: For insulating glass and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

B. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install glazing in mockups specified in section 08 41113 " Aluminum-Framed Entrance and Storefronts", to match glazing systems required for project, including glazing methods.

D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicated manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 3

E. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or toher openings, whether or not glazing passes hose stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

F. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Permanently mark either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.



Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 4

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thickness as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Glass Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Guardian Industries, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 2. PPG Industries, Inc. 3. Viracon, Inc.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project

according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings. b. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. c. Importance Factor: 1.0. d. Exposure Category: C.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=9297&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd





Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 5

3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

D. Fire-rated glass ceramic clear and wireless glazing material listed for use in non-impact safety-rated locations such as transoms and borrowed lites with fire rating requirements ranging from 20 to 90 minutes with required hose stream test.

E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction

indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for

overall unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 6

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.5 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

D. Silk Screened Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3; and complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's "Engineering Standards Manual."

2.6 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear and colored as indicated in the drawings.

2.7 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants.

2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction . 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

2.8 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 7

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

B. Glazing Sealant for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated. 1. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

2.9 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to

continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 8

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.11 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 9

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

L. Install glazing so that appropriate UL markings remain permanently visible.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 10

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 11

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.7 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GL-1: Clear annealed (fully tempered where indicated in drawing and as required by code) float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 1/4" (6mm). 2. Safety glazing required.

3.8 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type [GL-3]: Colored interlayer laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon, Vanceva Interlayer or approved equal 2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3 mm or as recommended by

manufacturer. 3. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch or as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Color: 1242 Lime Green (sample to be approved) 5. Safety glazing required.

3.9 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES

A. Glass Type GL-4: Fire-protection rated glass, clear, 20 min glass and frame

1. Basis-of-Design Product: TGP, FireLite NT or approved equal 2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 5mm 3. Listed for use in doors, idelites, transoms and borrowed lites. 4. Viewing condition: Premium grade

3.10 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GL-5:Clear insulating glass.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Guardian SN54 on crystal gray or approved equal 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. ?. [Fully tempered] float glass. 4. Outdoor Lite: Heat strenghened or fully tempered float glass. Refer to drawings

for location. 5. Indoor Lite: Annealed Fully tempered float glass. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .29 maximum. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .27 maximum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .23 9. Solar Shading Coefficient:.26 10. Visible Light Transmittance: 39% 11. Safety glazing required.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

GLAZING 08 8000 - 12

12. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .22 13. Solar Shading Coefficient:.25 14. Visible Light Transmittance: 40% 15. LSG: 1.82

3.11 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GL-7: Clear insulating laminated glass.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Guardian, SN54 on CrystalGray or approved equal 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1.223in 3. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Heat-strengthened Fully tempered float glass. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of heat-strengthened fully

tempered float glass.

a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm. b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch.

6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient:0.23. 9. Safety glazing required.



Addendum #4

11/12/2014

SECTION 09 5113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical ceiling panels. 2. Exposed grid suspension system. 3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01350, Special Environmental Requirements 2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 3. Section 09120 - Suspension System Framing and Furring for Plaster and Gypsum Board

Assemblies 4. Division 15 Sections - Mechanical Work 5. Division 16 Sections - Electrical Work

C. Alternates 1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed

product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect's review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products which have not been approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional compensation.

2. Submittals which do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section, including but not necessarily limited to, the following: Single source materials suppliers (if specified in Section 1.5); Underwriters' Laboratories Classified Acoustical performance; Panel design, size, composition, color, and finish; Suspension system component profiles and sizes; Compliance with the referenced standards.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 2. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 3. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the

Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation

Room Method.

5. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

6. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.

7. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

8. ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum.

9. ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings Systems.

10. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. 11. ASTM E 1477 Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical

Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers. 12. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 13. ASTM E 119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Material.

B. ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, "Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality"

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required.

B. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and 4 foot cross tees.

C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings. Show locations of items which are to be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.

D. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved independent laboratory classification of NRC, CAC, and AC.

E. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an Underwriter's Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall be required to send material from every production run appearing on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved laboratory for testing, at the architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturer's current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products.

a. Flame Spread: 25 or less b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.


A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Space Enclosure:

All ceiling products and suspension systems must be installed and maintained in accordance with Armstrong written installation instructions for that product in effect at the time of installation and best industry practice. Prior to installation, the ceiling product must be kept clean and dry, in an environment that is between 32°F (0°C) and 120°F (49°C) and not subject to Abnormal Conditions. Abnormal conditions include exposure to chemical fumes, vibrations, moisture from conditions such as building leaks or condensation, excessive humidity, or excessive dirt or dust buildup.

HumiGuard Plus Ceilings: Installation of the products shall be carried out where the temperature is between 32°F (0° C) and 120°F (49° C). It is not necessary for the area to be enclosed or for HVAC systems to be functioning. All wet work (plastering, concrete, etc) must be complete and dry. The ceilings must be maintained to avoid excessive dirt or dust buildup that would provide a medium for microbial growth on ceiling panels. Microbial protection does not extend beyond the treated surface as received from the factory, and does not protect other materials that contact the treated surface such as supported insulation materials.

Standard Ceilings: Do not install interior ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof; wet work in place is completed and nominally dry; work above ceilings is complete; and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity are continuously maintained at values near those intended for final occupancy. Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to:

1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping as a result of defects in materials or factory workmanship.

2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects 3. Acoustical Panels with BioBlock Plus or designated as inherently resistive to the growth

of micro-organisms installed with Armstrong suspension systems: Visible sag and will resist the growth of mold/mildew and gram positive and gram negative odor and stain causing bacteria.

1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

Part 2-PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ceiling Panels:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: Basis of Design or pre-approved equal by USG or Certainteed

2.2.0 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS

A. Acoustical Panels Type ACT-1:

1. Surface Texture: Fine 2. Composition: Mineral Fiber 3. Color: White 4. Size: 24in X 24in X 5/8in 5. Edge Profile: Tegular for interface with 9/16” Grid 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product

carton, 0.50. 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product

carton, 35 8. Emissions Testing: Section 01350 Protocol, < 13.5 ppb of formaldehyde when used

under typical conditions required by ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, "Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality"

9. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL) 10. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; White Panel: Light Reflectance: 0.83. 11. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus - Temperature is between 32°F (0° C) and 120°F

(49° C). It is not necessary for the area to be enclosed or for HVAC systems to be functioning. All wet work (plastering, concrete, etc) must be complete and dry.

12. Antimicrobial Protection: BioBlock Plus - Resistance against the growth of mold/mildew and gram positive and gram negative odor and stain causing bacteria.

13. Acceptable Product: Ultima Beveled Tegular, 1912 as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries.

2.3.0 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot-dipped galvanized steel as per ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with 9/16 IN type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping pre-finished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching.

1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 ID, 2. Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted

otherwise. 3. Acceptable Product: Suprafine 9/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured by Armstrong World

Industries, Inc. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct

Hung unless otherwise indicated. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre-stretched, with a

yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge. D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not

indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations, including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as exposed runner.

E. Accessories

2.4.0 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS

A. Acoustical Panels Type ACT-2:

1. Surface Texture: Smooth 2. Composition: Mineral Fiber 3. Color: White 4. Size: 48in X 24in X 5/8in 5. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In for interface with Prelude Plus XL Fire Guard 15/16"

Exposed Tee aluminum capped. 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product

carton, N/A. 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product

carton, 33 8. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL) 9. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; White Panel: Light Reflectance: 0.89. 10. Dimensional Stability: Standard -Space is enclosed, weatherproofed, HVAC systems

operating. 11. Antimicrobial Protection: BioBlock Plus - Resistance against the growth of mold/mildew

and gram positive and gram negative odor and stain causing bacteria. 12. Acceptable Product: Kitchen Zone, #672 as manufactured by Armstrong World

Industries.

2.5.0 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot-dipped galvanized steel as per ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with 15/16 IN type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping pre-finished aluminum in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching.

1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 HD. 2. Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted

otherwise. 3. Acceptable Product: Prelude Plus XL Fire Guard 15/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured

by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct

Hung unless otherwise indicated. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre-stretched, with a

yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge. D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not

indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations, including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as exposed runner.

E. Accessories

2.6.0 CUSTOM PERIMETER TRIM

A. Product/Manufacturer: Axiom Classic Perimeter Trim and Axoim Transitions Extruded Aluminum by Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: Basis of Design

B. Components: Edge trim system for suspended ceiling system, extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel, 10 foot straight or curved profiles to minimum (24 inches for 2 through 8 inch high)

(36 inch for 10 and 12 inch high) inside and outside radii for acoustical and for drywall applications.

1. Axiom Trim Channel: Reference as indicated on Drawings. Wide face with 3/4 inch horizontal legs, straight or curved sections with special bosses formed for attachment to the Axiom tee-bar connection clip or hanging clip; commercial quality, extruded aluminum, factory-finished in factory-applied baked polyester paint to match Armstrong color white.

2. Axiom Outside Corner Posts (Straight Only): Commercial quality extruded aluminum sections formed to match the Axiom trim channel profile; pre-assembled with built-in splice plates that connect to straight Axiom sections; factory-finished in factory-applied baked polyester paint to match Armstrong white color.

3. Axiom Inside Corners (Straight Only): Commercial quality extruded aluminum sections formed to match the Axiom trim channel profile that connect to straight Axiom sections, factory-finished in factory-applied baked polyester paint to match Armstrong white color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by manufacturer's printed recommendations. (Exception: HumiGuard Max Ceilings)

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.

B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires spaced 4-0 on center along the length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight.

C. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.

D. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and vertical surfaces.

E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on flanges of main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges by wall moldings.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Replace damaged and broken panels.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage.

1. Ceiling Touch-Up Paint, (Item #5760, 8oz. bottles) (Item #5761, quart size cans), "global white" latex paint should be used to hide minor scratches and nicks in the surface and to cover field tegularized edges that are exposed to view.

C. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113 - 1

SECTION 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 4. Fiber Cement Siding

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.



A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the manufacturer's label with following information:

1. Product name and type (description). 2. Batch date. 3. Color Number. 4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling requirements. 6. Surface preparation requirements. 7. Application instructions.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Duron, Inc. 3. Kwal Paint; Comex Group. 4. M.A.B. Paints. 5. Glidden Professional, Division of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 7. Sherwin-Williams; Paint Stores Group.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range; Refer to drawings.

1. 10 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.








Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2.3 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Exterior Acrylic Latex, Exterior Satin

1. Factory Primed

2. Sherwin Williams, DuraCraft Exterior Acrylic Latex Satin, 2 coats, or approved equal

B. Exterior Acrylic Coating

1. Factory Primed

2. Sherwin Williams DTM Acrylic Coating Semi Gloss, 2 coats, or approved equal.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Fiber Cement Substrates: Remove all dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose particles, laintance, foreign material and peeling or defective coatings. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly. If the surface is new, test it for pH, if the pH is higher than 8, prime with Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before

final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames.

4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory

primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with

paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Cementitious Siding:

1. Acrylic Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3: Sherwin Williams Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer Sealer, A24W8300, at 8.0 mils wet, 3.2 mils dry.

b. Topcoat: Acrylic Latex, exterior satin finish

B. Ferrous Metal and Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, water based, andti-corrosive for metal, MPI #107: Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, 5.0 to 10.0 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry.

b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss Level 3)[,

MPI #161]. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5)[, MPI #163]: Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils dry.

f. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #164].



Addendum #4

11/12/2014

INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 1

SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Steel. 2. Gypsum board.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.

2. Section 09 9600 "High-Performance Coatings" for high-performance and special-use coatings.

3. Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

4. Section 09 9739 "Dry Erase Coatings" for wall preparation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a matte flat finish.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a high-side sheen flat, velvet-like finish.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, an egshell finish.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a satin-like finish.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a semi-gloss finish.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a gloss finish.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014




B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.



1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.



b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014




A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the manufacturer's label with following information:

1. Product name and type (description). 2. Batch date. 3. Color Number. 4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling requirements. 6. Surface preparation requirements. 7. Application instructions.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.



A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Kwal Paint; Comex Group. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Sherwin-Williams; Paint Stores Group.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

D. Colors: As indicated on Drawings..

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show

materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



Addendum #4

11/12/2014


B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.


1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation

covering or other paintable jacket material.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014



A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with

paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.



B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULEPaint systems in this article are based on "MPI Manual." For renovation projects, consult "MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual" and revise paint systems accordingly.

High Performance Steel

a. Prime Coat: Factory primed. b. Topcoat: 2 Coats B66W00351 - Sher-Cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic

Semi-Gloss Coating Extra White OR EQUAL

B. Non High Performance Steel

1. Acrylic Coating

a. Primer: Factory Primed b. Primer: B66W00211 - DTM Acrylic Coating Semi-Gloss Extra White/Tint

Base OR EQUAL

C. Structural Ceiling


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


1. Acrylic Dryfall

a. 2 Coats : B42W00181 Pro Industrial Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall White Flat OR EQUAL

D. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Epoxy System

a. Primer: B28W08000 PVA Drywall Primer and Sealer OR EQUAL b. 1st Coat: K46W00151 Pro Industrial PreCatalyzed Waterbased Semi Gloss

Epoxy Extra White OR EQUAL

2. Walls - Eg-Shel Finish - Low Odor Zero VOC System

a. 1st Coat: B20W02651 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel Extra White OR EQUAL

b. 2nd Coat: B20W02651 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel Extra White OR EQUAL

3. Ceilings and Soffits - Flat Finish - Low Odor Zero VOC System

a. Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600, 0 g/L VOC OR EQUAL

b. 1st Coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Flat, B30W2650 series, 0 g/L VOC OR EQUAL

c. 2nd Coat: ProMar 200 zero VOC Flat, B30W2650 series, 0 g/L VOC or Equal



Addendum #4

11/12/2014

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 9600 - 1

SECTION 09 9600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates:

1. Exterior Substrates:

a. Steel. b. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.



1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014




1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system.

a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.






A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.



A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

B. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products indicated in the Exterior High-Performance Coating Schedule and Interior High-Performance Coating Schedule or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.

2. Diamond Vogel Paints.

3. Dulux (formerly ICI Paints); a brand of AkzoNobel.

4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

5. Sherwin-Williams; Paint Stores Group.

6. Or approved equal.

2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=11657&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456988712&mf=04&src=wd






Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.

E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated.


1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 2. SSPC-SP 11. 3. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. 4. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2. 5. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1.

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings.

G. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with

coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.



B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. High Performance Acrylic

a. Prime Coat: (1) coat primer, compatible with paint specified, factory primed b. Topcoat: (2) coats, High Performance Acrylic

1) Sherwin Williams, Sher-Cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic, B66-350 Semi-Gloss or approved equal

B. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:

1. Epoxy System [MPI EXT 5.4E]:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, vinyl wash, MPI #80. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.



Addendum #4

11/12/2014

METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2113.13 - 1

SECTION 10 2113.13 - METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes painted steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.


1. Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Section 10 2800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue

dispensers, grab bars, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.

B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars and

locations of blocking for surface-mounted toilet accessories. 4. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 5. Show locations of floor drains.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of toilet compartment material indicated.

1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.

2. Each type of hardware and accessory.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


E. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 POWDER COATED STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. 2. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 3. Global Steel Products Corp. 4. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. 5. Marlite 6. Scranton Products.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor anchored.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung, flat panel.

D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Provide with no-sightline system. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters.

2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units of size and material adequate for panel to withstand applied downward load on grab bar of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446, without deformation of panel.

3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.

E. Urinal-Screen Construction:

1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction.

F. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch nominal thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware.

G. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

H. Steel Sheet Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard baked-on finish, including thermosetting, electrostatically applied, and powder coatings. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

a. Allow for application of one color in each room.

2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories.

1. Material: Chrome-plated zamac . 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to

hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door.

3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.

4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.

6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743MAluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221.

B. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings, chrome plated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories, and solid blocking within panel where required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

D. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes at posts to conceal anchorage.

E. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.



Addendum #4

11/12/2014


C. Coordinate layout and installation of supports, inserts, and anchors built into other units of work for toilet compartment anchorage.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position indicated with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than two brackets attached near top and bottom of panel.

a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.

b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position.

D. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.

END OF SECTION 10 2113.13


Addendum #4

11/12/2014

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 2800 - 1

SECTION 10 2800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Vandal resistant toilet accessories 4. Anti-ligature bath and toilet accessories. 5. Custodial accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in

other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014



A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.

C. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

E. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

F. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Rooms include Women's Restroom 1202, Men's Restroom 1202, Women's Restroom 1130, Men's Restroom 1131, Womens' Restroom 2202, and Men's Restroom 2201.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:

1. American Specialties, Inc.

C. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser TBA-1:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2888 2. Description: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler

lockset. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

D. Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser TBA-2 :

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2974 2. Description: Surface mounted, Automatic, Universal roll paper towel dispenser.. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Minimum Capacity: 8-inch- wide, 800-foot- long roll. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) . 6. Lockset: Tumbler type.

E. Waste Receptacle TBA-3 :

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-3644. 2. Mounting: Open top, recessed . 3. Minimum Capacity: 12 gal. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Liner: LinerMate Trash Liner Holder - Unit equipped with LinerMate to facilitate

installation and removal of disposable trash liners inside wast receptable.

F. Liquid-Soap Dispenser TBA-4:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-826 2. Description: Designed for automatically dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 3. Mounting: Deck mounted on lavatory. 4. Capacity: 27 fl oz. 5. Materials: Polished Chorme . 6. Refill: Disposable container 7. Material: Bright polished chrome plated plastic with LED light indicators.

G. Grab Bar TBA-5:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-6806 Series 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).









Addendum #4

11/12/2014


4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: Straight, 36 inches long.

H. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit TBA-6:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-270 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with

tumbler lockset. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) .

I. Mirror Unit TBA-7:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-165 2460. 2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard .

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below.

a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

4. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

J. Baby Changing Station TBA-8

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick KB200-00 2. |Surface mounted 3. |Nominal Depth: 4 inches. 4. | 5. |Material and Finish: Cream colored polypropylene cabinet and bed. Unit 35"

W x 22" H

2.3 |SHELTER SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, :

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., unless noted otherwise, or comparable product by one of the following:


C. Shower Curtain Rod TBA-9:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: r Grab Bars Direct or equal 2. Description: 1-inch OD; fabricated from nominal 20 gauge thick stainless steel.








Addendum #4

11/12/2014


3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners, break away shower rod flanges.

4. Finish: No. 4 (satin).

D. Shower Curtain TBA-10:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Securing Cosmos, Safesupport Breakaway Shower Curtain, SR835-R04.

2. Size: Minimum [6 inches] [12 inches] wider than opening by 72 inches high. 3. Material: Vinyl, minimum 0.006 inch thick, transparent, matte. 4. Color:Clear . 5. Velcro fastening.

E. Folding Shower Seat TBA-11:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-5191. 2. Configuration: Rectangular seat. 3. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in

color as selected by Architect. 4. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Dimensions: Match manufacturer's seat. 6. Material and Finish: Solid surface. Color to match adjacent material

F. Robe Hook TBA-12:

1. Basis of Design Product: Bobrick B-983

2. Description: Single-prong unit, Vandal resistant clothes hook, secured from front

3. Material and finish: Sainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

G. Mirror Unit TBA-13:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-1658. 2. Description: Tempered glass channel frame mirror. 3. Frame: Frameless.

a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard . 4. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method

indicated below.




H. Grab Bar TBA-14:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Cape Cod Systems, ADA Compliant Grab Bar, CCSN#!$

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.






Addendum #4

11/12/2014



4. Outside Diameter: As required by the Manufacturer. 5. Configuration and Length: As needed to meet ADA requirements.

I. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser TBA-15:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-6857 2. Description: Single-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

J. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit TBA-6:



K. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser TBA-17:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-35903. 2. Mounting: . 3. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels300 C-fold or 400 multifold. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) .

L. Trash Receptacle with open top TBA-18: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2260 2. Mounting: Free Standing 3. Minimum Capacity:13 gal. 4. Stainless Steel Satin Finish.

2.4 SCHOOL BATHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Rooms Women's Restoom 2130 and Men's Restroom 2131.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bobrick or comparable product by one of the following:

1. American Standard.

C. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser TBA-1:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2888 2. Description: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler

lockset. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).








Addendum #4

11/12/2014


D. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit TBA-6:



E. Mirror Unit TBA-13:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-1658. 2. Description: Tempered glass channel frame mirror. 3. Frame: Frameless.

a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard .

4. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below.




F. Grab Bar TBA-14:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Cape Cod Systems, ADA Compliant Grab Bar, CCSN#!$

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.


4. Outside Diameter: As required by the Manufacturer. 5. Configuration and Length: As needed to meet ADA requirements.

G. Trash Receptacle with open top TBA-18:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2260 2. Mounting: Free Standing 3. Minimum Capacity:13 gal. 4. Stainless Steel Satin Finish.

H. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser TBA-17:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-35903. 2. Mounting: . 3. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels300 C-fold or 400 multifold. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) . ?.







Addendum #4

11/12/2014


I. Liquid-Soap Dispenser TBA-19:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-8221 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in [liquid or lotion] [lather] form. 3. Mounting: Deck mounted on vanity. 4. Capacity: 20 fl oz. 5. Materials: Refer to Manufacturer .

2.5 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to complience with requirements.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bobrick or comparable product by one of the following:


C. Mop and Broom Holder TBA-20:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-223 x 24. 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 3. Length: 24". 4. Mop/Broom Holders: spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.






Addendum #4

11/12/2014


B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



Addendum #4

11/12/2014

SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 3661 - 1

SECTION 12 3661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes.

B. Related Sections:


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.

B. Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.

C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- thick, solid surface material.

D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.

2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

B. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.

C. Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following::

a. Living Stone or Equal

2. Colors and Patterns: As specified on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

2. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014




Addendum #4

11/12/2014

SITE FURNISHINGS 12 9300 - 1

SECTION 12 9300 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Seating. 2. Tables. 3. Bicycle racks. 4. Trash receptacles. 5. Planters.


1. Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts cast in concrete footings.

2. Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" for excavation for installing concrete footings.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 6-inch- long linear components and 4-inch- square sheet components.

E. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Material Certificates: For site furnishings.


A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014



A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Bench Replacement Slats: No fewer than two full-size units for each size indicated.

2. Trash Receptacle Inner Containers: Five full-size units for each size indicated, but no fewer than two units.

3. Anchors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEATING - BENCH

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:

1. Freesia Model FRE-20, horizontal steel slat seating, 6' length, Color: Red. Provide product by:

a. Victor Stanley

2.2 SEATING - TABLES Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

1. Type 1 - N-H-425 with backs, horizontal steel slatting, ADA, 6 person (5 seats), Color: Titanium. Provide product by:

a. Victor Stanley

2. Type 2 - N-364 with backs, horizontal steel slatting, 4 person, Color: Titanium. Provide product by:

a. Victor Stanley

3. Type 3 - N-H-363 with backs, horizontal steel slatting, ADA, 4 person (3 seats), Color: Titanium. Provide product by:

a. Victor Stanley

4. Type 4 - 2 person table - RPCT-30 and 2 FTRS back seats, Color: Titanium. Provide product by:

a. Victor Stanley

5. SeatSeat Height: [As indicated] <Insert dimension>. 6. Seat Surface Shape: [Flat] [Contoured or dished]. 7. Weight: <Insert weight>.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


B. Table Top:

1. Surface Shape: [Round] [Hexagon] [Shape indicated] <Insert shape>. 2. Feature: [Center umbrella hole] <Insert feature>.

2.3 BICYCLE RACKS

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. Madrax, U-Rack, 2.375" OD Tubing 22" Long, Color: Red

B. Bicycle Rack Construction:

1. Installation Method: Surface flange anchored at finished grade to substrate indicated with stainless steel anchor bolts.

2.4 PLANTERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following:

1. PRS-18, Color: Silver. Provide product by:

a. Victor Stanley

B. Overall Height: 22"

C. Overall Diameter: 28"

D. Inner Container: Rigid plastic container.

E. Capacity: 18 gal.

F. Installation Method: Freestanding

2.5 TRASH RECEPTACLES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. ES-135, Color: Titanium. Provide product by:

a. Victor Stanley


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2.6 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated; free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Rolled or Cold-Finished Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429/B 429M.

4. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 5. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Pipe: Standard-weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, or

electric-resistance-welded pipe complying with ASTM A 135/A 135M. 3. Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500/A 500M. 4. Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel

tubing complying with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in ASTM A 500/A 500M; zinc coated internally and externally.

5. Sheet: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

6. Perforated Metal: From steel sheet not less than [0.075-inch (1.9-mm)] [0.090-inch (2.3-mm)] [0.120-inch (3.0-mm)] <Insert dimension> nominal thickness;

manufacturer's standard perforation pattern. 7. Expanded Metal: Carbon-steel sheets, deburred after expansion, and

complying with ASTM F 1267. 8. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, grade as recommended by

fabricator for type of use intended. 9. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 200.

C. Stainless Steel: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666. 2. Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe complying with ASTM A 312/A 312M. 3. Tubing: ASTM A 554.

D. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Stainless steel; commercial quality, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant , concealed, recessed, and capped or plugged.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

F. Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective zinc coating applied to components after fabrication:

1. Zinc-Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a

minimum of 0.9 oz./sq. ft. (0.27 kg/sq. m) of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, polymer film. Internal, same as external or

consisting of 81 percent zinc pigmented coating, not less than 0.3 mil (0.0076 mm) thick.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


2. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or ASTM A 924/A 924M.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.

B. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length, full-penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.

D. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs, barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.

E. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.

2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.9 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

B. PVC Finish: Manufacturer's standard, UV-light stabilized, mold-resistant, slip-resistant, matte-textured, dipped or sprayed-on, PVC-plastisol finish, with flame retardant added; complying with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.


Addendum #4

11/12/2014


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.



ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 1

SECTION 32 9200 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hydroseeding. 2. Sodding. 3. Erosion-control material(s).


1. Section 32 9300 "Plants" for trees, shrubs, ground covers, and other plants as well as border edgings and mow strips.

2. Section 33 4600 "Subdrainage" for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

C. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

D. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation" and drawing designations for planting soils.

E. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.




ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014



A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.

B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture, stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.

C. Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer.

D. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to Project.


A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.

2. Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in all of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network:

a. Landscape Industry Certified Technician - Exterior. b. Landscape Industry Certified Lawncare Technician.

5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Soil Analysis: Test existing on-site topsoil and imported topsoil if required per analysis of existing soils. Furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio, deletrious material, pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of soil.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60.

2. The soil testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of one representative sample per site acre shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes.

3. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth.

a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" sections in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours of harvesting and in time for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying.

C. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.


A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of .

1. Sodding: April 15-Oct 15 2. Seeding: April through June or late August through September 15

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but not for less than the following periods:

1. Sodded Turf: through Project's substantial completion.

B. Initial Native Seed Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until satisfactory native grass stand is established, but not for less that 1 year from date of Project's substantial completion.

1. Seeded Areas: through Project's substantial completion.

1.11 SEED ESTABLISHMENT

A. Maintain all seeded areas against and defects due to any cause until Substantial Completion.

B. Re-establish all seeded areas when seeded areas are no longer in a satisfactory growing condition as determined by the Architect and as outlined below.

C. Seeded areas must be minimally established to the following conditions prior to Substantial Completion:

1. Native grass areas: At least 80% of the seeded area covered with germinated seed and no bare spots greater than 6 inches square after 60 days.

2. The entire area shall be free of weeds and foreign grasses. 3. Until final acceptance, seeded areas that fail after having been replaced

previously, shall be replaced until it meets establishment as required above. Replacement materials shall be identified to those originally specified. Provide seed tags to the Architect for verification.

4. The seeded areas will not be accepted in parts. Each time and portion or section of the seeded area requires replacement of remedial action, the contractor shall continue maintaining the entire seeded area until it fully meets the minimum establishment requirements stated above.

5. All expenses incurred, including repairs from vandalism, for the replacement and/or establishment of the seed areas are to be borne by the Contractor.

1.12 SEED MAINTENANCE

1. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until the entire seeded area meets the requirements for Seed Establishment (see item 1.10, above), and not sooner than Substantial Completion.

2. Continue maintenance until Final Acceptance. 3. Maintain and establish seeded areas by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing,

trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll, re-grade, and plant bare or eroded areas as necessary to comply with Seed Establishment.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


a. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new hydromulch and tackifier as originally specified.

b. Apply Round-Up or appropriate species-selective herbicide to the entire stand in the following spring while the Native grass is still dormant to eradicate weeds. The contractor is to properly time this application to not harm the Native grass.

4. Watering: Provide a permanent irrigation system to convey water from sources and to keep seeding area uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm) or as determined necessary to promote proper germination.

a. Schedule irrigation system to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, or displacement of seed or mulch.

b. Monitor the watering of the seeded areas to not over water or stress plant material. Replacement of stressed or dead plant material caused by the watering or establishing of the seeded areas shall be completed immediately, prior to the beginning of the warranty period at the Contractor's expense.

c. Water seeded areas at a sufficient rate to promote proper germination.

5. Mowing

a. Native grass: Mow no shorter than 6" to maintain tall weed growth only. Mow to prevent weed seeds from developing. Vacuum all clippings. Allow grass clumps to spread.

6. Post Germination fertilization:

a. Apply fertilizer when appropriate after mowing and when grass is dry. b. Do not fertilize if weed growth is excessive. Bring weed infestations under

control prior to fertilizing. c. Use a slow release fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1/2

pound per 1000-sq ft (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) at a frequency to quickly and properly promote seed establishment.

1.13 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY

A. Warranty lawns and grasses for a period of one year after date or substantial completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth.

B. Remove and replace lawns and grasses found to be dead or in unhealthy condition during warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty period. Replace lawns and grasses which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period; unless, in opinion of Architect, it is advisable to extend warranty period for a full growing season.

1. Another warranty inspection will be conducted at end of extended warranty period, if any, to determine acceptance or rejection.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. Not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed

B. Seed Species: State certified seed of grass species as follows:

1. Irrigated and Non-Irrigated native seed mix:

a. Apply seed at a rate of 100 pounds of pure live seed (PLS) per acre. "Low Grow Mix" from Arkansas Valley Seed Company or approved equal. Arkansas Valley Seed; 4300 Monaco Street, Denver, CO 80216, 877-907-3337, www.avseeds.com

1) Low Grow Mix:

a) Ephraim Crested Wheatgrass 30% b) Sheep Fescue, VNS 25% c) Perennial Ryegrass, VNS 20% d) Chewings Fescue, VNS 15% e) Canada Bluegrass, VNS 10% f) Cover Crop - Apply at a rate of 20 pounds of pure live seed

(PLS) per acre. Blend with Low Grow Mix prior to application. Provide QuickGuard (TM) sterile triticale hybrid, or approved equal.

2. Boreal Creeping Red Fescue Seed, available from Arkansas Valley Seed Inc., 4300 Monaco Street, Denver, CO 80216, 303-320-7500

2.2 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turfgrass Sod: Certified, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

B. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 85 percent germination, not less than 95 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed:

1. Typer 1: Full Sun: Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), a minimum of three cultivars.

2.3 FERTILIZERS

A. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


1. Composition: as recommended by soil analysis.

2.4 HYDROMULCHES

A. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.

2.5 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

1. Round-Up or approved equal.

2.6 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free Organic Compost, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moiture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/4-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances to to plantings; or approved equal; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: Class 1. 2. Provide product with equivalent or greater specification as BioComp for A1

Organics: 16350 WCR 76; Eaton, CO 80615. Phone: 970-454-3492. Web: www.a1organics.com

3. All Natural and/or Natural Base fertilizers must be used on this project and shall be derived from stable, aerobically produced compost and other all-natural sources of plant nutrients or slow release nitrogen materials formed in an easy-to use homogenous prill; and complete with guaranteed minimums of 80-90% slow release nitrogen (SRN) for the all-natural fertilizers and 65-85% slow release nitrogen for the natural base fertilizers, phosporous (expressed as P2O5) and potassium (expressed as K2O) derived from naturally occuring potassium sulfate and organic sources.

4. All-Natural and Natural Base Fertilizers derived from a compost base shall be manufactured only at USEPA or EU permitted facilities. The compost process must meet of exceed U.S. Federal Environmental Protection Agency (EPA Process to Further Reduce Pathogens (PFRP). The finished product shall be tested by the contractor by an analytical laboratory independent of the manufacturer and be determined to be free from animal, human, plant and soil pathogens; pesticides, PCB's, insect larvae, weed seeds, and foreign materials such as tramp metal, plastics, municipal and industrial solid waste and biosolids.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


5. The all natural fertilizer ("natural fertilizers") and "natural-base" fertilizers used in this project shall be in the form of homogenous granules and shall have moisture content not exceeding 8%. Particle size will be in the range of approximately 200 SGN (mesh size -7 +14 or 2.8 mm to 1.4mm) for standard size fertilizer application requirements and 100 SGN (mesh size -14 +30 or 1.4 mm to 0.5mm) and have low odor and low dust levels.

B. No substitutions shall be considered without documentation of compliance with the above minimum acceptable standards and the written permission of the owner's representative.

2.7 PLANTING SOILS

A. Amended Existing in-place surface soil: Soil Analysis: Test existing on-site topsoil and imported topsoil if required per analysis of existing soils. Furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil.

1. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth (Refer to Section 1.5 Quality Assurance).

a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

2. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action

B. Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources: Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. Soil Analysis: Test imported topsoil if required per analysis of existing soils. Furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil.

1. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth (Refer to Section 1.5 Quality Assurance).

a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

2. Additional Properties of Imported Topsoil or Manufactured Topsoil: Screened and free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of noxious weeds and invasive plants including, but not limited to, quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass; not infested with nematodes, grubs, other pests, pest eggs, or other undesirable organisms and disease-causing plant pathogens; friable and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration. Continuous, air-filled, pore-space content on a volume/volume basis shall be at least 15 percent when moisture is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent on a dry weight basis.

3. Mix imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil with the following soil amendments in the following quantities to produce planting soil:

a. Ratio of Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 4 cubic yards per 1000 square yards.

2.8 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS

A. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.

B. Erosion-Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable burlap or spun-coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb/sq. yd., with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.

C. Erosion-Control Mats: Cellular, nonbiodegradable slope-stabilization mats designed to isolate and contain small areas of soil over steeply sloped surface, of [3-inch] [4-inch] [6-inch] <Insert dimension> nominal mat thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended anchorage system for slope conditions.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Invisible Structures, Inc; Slopetame 2. b. Presto Products Company; Geoweb. c. Tenax Corporation - USA; Tenweb. d. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.


C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray.

2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation."

B. Placing Planting Soil: Place and mix planting soil in place over exposed subgrade.

1. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

C. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

D. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS

A. Prepare area as specified in "Turf Area Preparation" Article.

B. For erosion-control mats, install planting soil in two lifts, with second lift equal to thickness of erosion-control mats. Install erosion-control mat and fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.

C. Fill cells of erosion-control mat with planting soil and compact before planting.

D. For erosion-control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.

E. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

3.5 HERBICIDE TREATMENT FOR SEEDED AREAS

A. Herbicide Treatment: To be performed over the entire area to be seeded. Allow sufficient time to successfully complete the entire Herbicide Treatment process before continuing with the seed installation.

1. Herbicide treatment must be completed during the growing season. 2. Water surface 1/2" per week for two weeks prior to application if natural

precipitation does not supply this amount to encourage weed seed germination. 3. Treat site with “Round-up” herbicide in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. Schedule the Round-up application when the probability of forecasted rainfall is minimal for the next 48 hours.

4. Two days after application, water surface 1/2" per week if natural precipitation does not supply this amount to encourage weed seed germination.

5. Ten (10) days after the first “Round-up” application, review surface for evidence of plant growth.

6. Repeat steps 2, 3, 4, and 5, as many time as necessary until there is no evidence of plant growth after a 10-day period.

7. Obtain Architect’s approval of surface conditions fourteen (14) days after last herbicide application. Substantial acceptance for seed establishment requires that the entire seeded area is weed free.

8. Remove plant debris from treated area.

3.6 NATIVE GRASS SEEDING

A. Sow seed ½” deep by mechanical drill method only (before hydromulching). In tight areas or on steep slopes where a mechanical drill is not practical, broadcast seed with spreader and lightly rake into soil. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other.

1. Innoculate with Mycorrhizal fungi prior to installation.

2. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


3. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.

4. Restore grade if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.

B. Protect seeded areas by hydromulching (hydromulching only required in areas of irrigated native seed).

3.7 HYDROSEEDING

A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, commercial fertilizer slow-release fertilizer , and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.

1. Mix slurry with fiber-mulch manufacturer's recommended tackifier. 2. Spray-apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process.

Apply slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 2000-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate. At this application rate the soil should be completely covered with no soil or shadows of soil visible.

3.8 HYDROMULCHING

A. Hydromulching: Mix seed fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydromulch application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.

1. Mix slurry with fiber-mulch manufacturer's recommended tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply

slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 2000-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate. At this application rate the soil should be completely covered with no soil or shadows of soil visible.

a. Re-apply hydromulch that has been displaced for any reason.

3.9 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting[ unless a suitable preservation method is accepted by Architect prior to delivery time]. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to soil or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with soil, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across slopes exceeding 1:3.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood stakes spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than two anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.

C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod.

3.10 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.

3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.

2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.

C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:

1. Mow Kentucky bluegrass to a height of 1-1/2 to 2 inches. 2. Mow turf-type tall fescue to a height of 2 to 3 inches.

3.11 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014


2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

3.12 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.13 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.

D. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.


A. Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Turf Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established, but for not less than the following periods:

1. Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion.

a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.

2. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.



ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 1

SECTION 32 9300 - PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plants. 2. Planting Soils. 3. Tree stabilization. 4. Tree-watering devices. 5. Landscape edgings. 6. Mulches.


1. Section 32 9200 "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn), hydroseeding, and erosion-control materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with a ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

C. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

D. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 2

F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

G. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

H. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 32 9113 "Soil Preparation" for drawing designations for planting soils.

I. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

J. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

K. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.

L. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.

1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.





1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 3

2. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.

B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:

1. Trees and Shrubs: [Three] <Insert number> Samples of each variety and size[ delivered to site for review]. Maintain approved Samples on-site as a standard for comparison.

2. Organic Mulch: 1-quart volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.

3. Mineral Mulch: 2 lb of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and installed on-site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the material.

4. Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches. 5. Proprietary Root-Ball-Stabilization Device: One unit. 6. Slow-Release, Tree-Watering Device: One unit of each size required. 7. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color

selected. 8. Root Barrier: Width of panel by 12 inches.


A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following:

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to

methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

C. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to Project.


A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 4


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.

2. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in all of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network:

a. Landscape Industry Certified Technician - Exterior. b. Landscape Industry Certified Horticultural Technician.

5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

C. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes.

1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container-grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes.

2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.

D. Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Architect may also observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.

1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site

E. Soil Analysis: See requirements in 32 9200 - Turfs and Grasses.

F. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: See Requirements in 32 9200 - Turf and Grasses.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 5


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.

C. Deliver bare-root stock plants within [24 hours] [36 hours] <Insert time> of digging. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. Transport in covered, temperature-controlled vehicles, and keep plants cool and protected from sun and wind at all times.

D. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

E. Handle planting stock by root ball.

F. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting.

G. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation.

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.

H. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.

I. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material.

2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 3. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a

fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly wet condition.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 6


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.

B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Planting Period - April 1 - Oct 1

C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

D. Coordination with Turf Area (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grade are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.

1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization and edgings. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:

a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season.

b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period.

c. A limit of one replacement of each plant is required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 7


A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but not for less than maintenance period below.

1. Maintenance Period: 3 months from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but not less than the maintenance period below.

1. Maintenance Period: 3 months from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots are unacceptable.

2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which begins at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

D. Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 8

E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is indicated on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting.

2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: See requirements in 32 9200 - Turfs and Grasses.

2.3 FERTILIZERS

A. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip-type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.

1. Size: 21-gram tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5

percent potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.

2.4 PLANTING SOILS

A. Planting Soils: See requirements in 32 9200 - Turfs and Grasses.

2.5 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch Type 1: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Recycled colored pine mulch 2. Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1/2 inch minimum. 3. Color: Brown. 4. Manufacturer: Discount Landscape Supply or approved equal, 303-551-5551,

[email protected]

B. Organic Mulch Type 2: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Shredded Red Cedar Mulch

2. Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1/2 inch minimum 3. Color: Natural.

C. Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of the following type, size range, and color:

1. Type: Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth-faced stone. 2. Size Range: 1-1/2 inches maximum, 3/4 inch minimum. 3. Color: Match neighboring property to the west.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 9

2.6 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS

A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.

2.7 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

1. Roundup, or approved equal.

2.8 TREE-STABILIZATION MATERIALS

A. Choose one of the following:

1. Trunk-Stabilization Materials:

a. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new [hardwood] [softwood with specified wood pressure-preservative treatment], free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by length indicated, pointed at one end.

b. Wood Deadmen: Timbers measuring 8 inches in diameter and 48 inches long, treated with specified wood pressure-preservative treatment.

c. Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes or [turnbuckles] [compression springs].

d. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter.

e. Tree-Tie Webbing: UV-resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets.

f. Guy Cables: Five-strand, 3/16-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated [turnbuckles] [compression springs], a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts.

g. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long.

B. Root-Ball Stabilization Materials:

1. Proprietary Root-Ball Stabilization Devices: Proprietary at- or below-grade stabilization systems to secure each new planting by root ball and that do not encircle the trunk; sized according to manufacturer's written recommendations unless otherwise indicated.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 10

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1) Platipus Earth Anchoring System, Plati-mat, models RF0P, RF1P, RF2P, RF3P, RF4P, or RF5P as needed for size of tree to be stabilized.

2.9 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS

A. Steel Edging: Standard commercial-steel edging, fabricated in sections of standard lengths, with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes.

1. Edging Size: 12 gauge thickness, 4 inches (100 mm) deep. 2. Stakes: Tapered steel, a minimum of 15 inches long. 3. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers.

2.10 TREE-WATERING DEVICES

A. Slow-Release Watering Device: Standard product manufactured for drip irrigation of plants and emptying its water contents over [an extended time period] [two to nine hours] [two to three weeks] <Insert number or range>; manufactured from UV-light-stabilized nylon-reinforced polyethylene sheet, PVC, or HDPE plastic.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Engineered Watering Solutions; PQ Partners, LLC. 2. Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [black] [dark

chocolate] [green] [or] [tan] <Insert color>.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable.

C. Planter Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.

D. Planter Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile manufactured for separation applications and made of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them.

E. Mycorrhizal Fungi: Dry, granular inoculant containing at least 5300 spores per lb of vesicular-arbuscular mycorrhizal fungi and 95 million spores per lb of ectomycorrhizal fungi, 33 percent hydrogel, and a maximum of 5.5 percent inert material.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 11

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations with adequate overhead clearance.

3. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.

B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required.

D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.

3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to be minimum of 12 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thorougly

blend planting soil.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 12

a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days.

b. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.

B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plan with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

C. Placing Planting Soil: Place and mix planting soil in-place over exposed subgrade .

D. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

E. Application of Mycorrhizal Fungi: At time directed by Architect, broadcast dry product uniformly over prepared soil at application rate [indicated on Drawings] [according to manufacturer's written recommendations] <Insert application rate>.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.

1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped stock.

3. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.

4. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball.

5. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.

6. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements.

7. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 8. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected. 9. If drain tile is indicated on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to

top of porous backfill over tile.

B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may not be used as backfill soil unless otherwise indicated.

C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 13

1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- diameter holes, 24 inches apart, into free-draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet, whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.

D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits.

E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.

3.5 SHRUB AND VINE PLANTING

A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.

B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

C. Container-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.

1. Backfill: Planting soil. 2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and

air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

a. As recommended in soils report from soil testing laboratory.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

D. Tie vines to fence. Separate individual stems carefully so as to not break vine stalks. Spread vines out on fence and tie with biodegradable ties to assist in vines taking to fence.

E. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.

3.6 MECHANIZED TREE-SPADE PLANTING

A. Use the same tree spade to excavate the planting hole as will be used to extract and transport the tree.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 14

B. When extracting the tree, center the trunk within the tree spade and move tree with a solid ball of earth.

C. Cut exposed roots cleanly during transplanting operations.

D. Plant trees following procedures in "Tree, Shrub, and Vine Planting" Article.

E. Where possible, orient the tree in the same direction as in its original location.

3.7 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING

A. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Architect.

B. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.

3.8 TREE STABILIZATION

A. Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 72 inches above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses.

2. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees with two stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 2-1/2 inches or less in caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4 inches in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees.

3. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

4. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

B. Trunk Stabilization by Staking and Guying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Stake and guy trees more than 14 feet in height and more than 3 inches in caliper unless otherwise indicated.

1. Site-Fabricated, Staking-and-Guying Method: Install no fewer than three guys spaced equally around tree.

a. Securely attach guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade. Adjust spacing to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Provide turnbuckle for each guy wire and tighten securely.

b. For trees more than 6 inches in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen buried at least 36 inches below grade. Provide turnbuckle for each guy wire and tighten securely.

c. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 15

d. Support trees with multiple strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

e. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade.

C. Root-Ball Stabilization: Install at- or below-grade stabilization system to secure each new planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated.

1. Proprietary Root-Ball Stabilization Device: Install root-ball stabilization system sized and positioned as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.9 PLACING SOIL IN PLANTERS

A. Place a layer of drainage gravel at least 4 inches thick in bottom of planter. Cover bottom with filter fabric and wrap filter fabric 4 inches up on all sides. Duct tape along the entire top edge of the filter fabric, to secure the filter fabric against the sides during the soil-filling process.

B. Fill planter with planting soil. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 1-1/2 inches below top of planter, allowing natural settlement.

3.10 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated on Drawings in even rows with triangular spacing.

B. Use planting soil for backfill.

C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that minimally disturbs the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes.

E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.

F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.

3.11 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 12 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins.

B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 16

1. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 4-inches average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench , and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

2. Mineral Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 4-inches dimension average thickness of mineral mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

3.12 EDGING INSTALLATION

A. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches apart, driven below top elevation of edging.

3.13 INSTALLING SLOW-RELEASE WATERING DEVICE

A. Provide one device for each tree.

B. Place device on top of the mulch at base of tree stem and fill with water according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.14 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.

B. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when possible to minimize use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

3.15 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover areas according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas.


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 17

C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.16 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs. 2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if

approved. 3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to

full-growth status, as determined by Architect.

B. Remove and replace trees that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern.

1. Provide new trees of same size as those being replaced for each tree of 4 inches or smaller in caliper size.

2. Species of Replacement Trees: Same species being replaced.


A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

D. After installation and before [Substantial Completion] <Insert time>, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.

E. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices are in good working order and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices.


A. Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below:


ADDENDUM #4

11/12/2014

PLANTS 32 9300 - 18

1. Maintenance Period: Three months from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below:

1. Maintenance Period: Three months from date of Substantial Completion.


Specifications11/11/2014

Project

SHILOH HOUSE

WALK-IN COOLER (1 REQ'D)Item 1 -

Kolpak Model WALK-IN

Walk-in Cooler

WALK-IN FREEZER (1 REQ'D)Item 2 -

Kolpak Model WALK-IN

Walk-in Freezer

REMOTE CONDENSER UNIT (1 REQ'D)Item 3 -

Kolpak Model REMOTE COMPRESSOR

Remote Compressor for walk-in cooler, part of no. 1

REMOTE CONDENSER UNIT (1 REQ'D)Item 4 -

Kolpak Model REMOTE COMPRESSOR

Remote Compressor for walk-in freezer, part of no. 1

EVAPORATOR, WALK-IN COOLER (1 REQ'D)Item 5 -

Kolpak Model EVAPORATEOR

Evaporator, Walk-in cooler, part of no. 1

EVAPORATOR, WALK-IN FREEZER (1 REQ'D)Item 6 -

Kolpak Model EVAPORATEOR

Evaporator, Walk-in freezer, part of no. 1

PLASTIC WITH METAL FRAME SHELVING <OPTIONAL> (20 REQ'D)Item 7 -

Metro Model MQ1848G

MetroMax Q™ Shelf, 48"W x 18"D, open grid polymer with Microban® antimicrobial protection, epoxy

coat steel frame, wedge connectors

<Optional> MetroMax Q™ Post, 74"H, for stationary use, epoxy coated steel

with built in Microban® antimicrobial product protection

20 ea

<Optional> MetroMax Q™ Shelf, 36"W x 18"D, open grid polymer with8 ea

Page 1 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications

Microban® antimicrobial protection, epoxy coat steel frame, wedge connectors

<Optional> MetroMax Q™ Post, 63"H, for stationary use, epoxy coated steel

with built in Microban® antimicrobial product protection

8 ea

WIRE SHELVING <OPTIONAL> (4 REQ'D)Item 8 -

Metro Model 1860BR

Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 60"W x 18"D, Bright (zinc) finish, plastic split sleeves are included in each

carton, NSF

<Optional> Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 48"W x 18"D, Bright (zinc) finish, plastic

split sleeves are included in each carton, NSF

4 ea



4 ea



4 ea

<Optional> Super Erecta® SiteSelect™ Post, 74-5/8"H, adjustable leveling bolt,

posts are grooved at 1" increments & numbered at 2" increments, double

grooved every 8", chrome finish

16 ea

WIRE SHELVING <OPTIONAL> (8 REQ'D)Item 9 -

Metro Model 2448BR

Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 48"W x 24"D, Bright (zinc) finish, plastic split sleeves are included in each

carton, NSF

<Optional> Super Erecta® Post, 74"H, for use with stem casters, chrome plated

finish

8 ea

<Optional> Super Erecta® Stem Caster, swivel, 5" diameter, 1-1/4" face, resilient

wheel tread, 200 lb. capacity

8 ea

<Optional> Super Erecta® Stem Caster, brake (foot operated), 5" diameter,

1-1/4" face, resilient wheel tread, 200 lb. capacity, brakes are foot operated

8 ea

CUSTOM FAB (1 REQ'D)Item 10 -

Nationwide Fabricators Model SERVING COUNTER

Serving Counter size and shape per plan , est.

STATIONARY FOOD GUARD (1 REQ'D)Item 11 -

English Mfg. Model M-112-3

Sneezeguard, Pass-Over, 41-80" long, posts 1" OD with brushed stainless steel finish (2) end posts (1)

center post (4) 1/4" clear tempered glass panels with polished edges

1/4" glass, standard1 ea


Page 2 of 21

Item 15 - HAND SINK (1 REQ'D)

11/11/2014

Specifications

Stainless steel top shelf, in lieu of glass1 ea

End cap for 1" tubing1 ea

DROP-IN HOT WELL (1 REQ'D)Item 12 -

Wells Model MOD-300TDAF

Food Warmer, top-mount, built-in, electric, auto-fill, (3) 12" x 20" openings, drain with one valve, wet/dry

operation, thermostatic control, stainless steel interior, insulated aluminum steel housing, cULus

Limited 2 year parts & 1 year labor warranty, standard1 ea

208-240v/60/3-ph, 3.72-4.95kW, 10.3-11.9 amps, direct (field convertible to

single phase)

1 ea

AMPS MOCPMCAHPKWNEMAVOLTS CYCLE CONN

ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

10.3/11.9 3.72/4.95208-240 60 Direct31

DROP-IN COLD FOOD PAN (1 REQ'D)Item 13 -

Delfield Model N8143B

Drop-In Mechanically Cooled Pan, 3-pan size, 1" dia. drain, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner & top,

galvanized steel outer liner, includes adapter bars, self-contained refrigeration, cUL, UL, NSF-7 (cut-out

size 42.5" x 25"), 1/5 hp

115v/60/1-ph, 4.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard1 ea

(5) Year compressor warranty (net)1 ea

(1) Year parts & labor contract (net)1 ea

Remote toggle switch assembly, shipped loose1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

4 1/55-15P115 60 Cord & Plug11


English Mfg. Model M-112-3

Sneezeguard, Pass-Over, 41-80" long, posts 1" OD with brushed stainless steel finish (2) end posts (1)

center post (4) 1/4" clear tempered glass panels with polished edges



Stainless steel top shelf, in lieu of glass1 ea

End cap for 1" tubing1 ea

Page 3 of 21

11/11/2014

SpecificationsHAND SINK (1 REQ'D)Item 15 -

Advance Tabco Model 7-PS-60-1X

Hand Sink, wall model, 14" wide x 10" front-to-back x 5" deep bowl, 20 gauge 304 series stainless steel,

with splash mounted faucet, basket drain, wall bracket, NSF & CSA listed

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE

CONDENSEROUTLET SIZE

WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

1-1/2"1/2"1/2"1 1

Item 16-17 - SPARE NO.

FABRICATION (1 REQ'D)Item 18 -

Eagle Group Model SOILED DSIHTABLE

Soiled Dishtable

DISPOSER (1 REQ'D)Item 19 -

InSinkErator Model SS-200-18A-MRS

SS-200™ Complete Disposer Package, with 18" diameter bowl, 6-5/8" diameter inlet, with removable

splash baffle & reversible bowl cover, 2 HP motor, stainless steel construction, includes syphon breaker,

solenoid valve, flow control valve, manual reverse switch, adjustable leg kit

(1) year parts & labor warranty from date of installation (standard)1 ea

Standard height disposer body1 ea

208v/60/3-ph, 3.3 amps1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

3.3 2208 60 31

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

2"1/2"1 1

PRE-RINSE (1 REQ'D)Item 20 -

Fisher Model 2210-WB

Pre-Rinse Assembly, 8" adjustable centers, wall-mounted mixing valve, with spring action flexible

gooseneck, with spray head (1.15 gallons per minute @ 60 PSI), with wall bracket

Page 4 of 21

of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

1/2"1/2"1 1

DISHWASHER, HOOD, VENTLESS <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 21 -

CMA Dishmachines Model CMA-180-VL TALL

Ventless Dishwasher, door type, tall, high temperature sanitizing, 25-1/2"W x 29"D x 95-5/16"H, fully

automatic cycle, door actuated start, (40) racks/hour, 20" x 20" rack size, 27" opening, 3-door feature for

straight or corner application, built-in 12.0 kW booster heater, booster-safety thermostat, 6.0kW wash

tank heater, ventless heat recovery & condensation removal, water level safety control, automatic heat

exchange wash-down, rinse pressure regulating valve included, door safety interlock system, stainless

steel construction, 1 HP, ENERGY STAR®, NSF, UL, cULus, ASTM

<Optional> 208v/60/3-ph, 49.0 amps, standard1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

49208 60 31

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

1/2" 2"1/2"1 1

FABRICATION (1 REQ'D)Item 22 -

Eagle Group Model CLEAN DISHTABLE

Clean Dishtable

OVERSHELF (1 REQ'D)Item 23 -

Eagle Group Model SWS1248-14/3

Wall Shelf, Snap-n-Slide®, 1 1/2" Rolled Front Edge, 12" x 48", 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel, 1 1/2"

upturn on rear and ends, stainless steel wall brackets mount to wall studs, no wall backing required, 180

lb. weight capacity, NSF

DISH CART <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 24.1 -

Cambro Model ADCS110

Dish Cart, adjustable, 6 towers, minimum dish size 4-1/2", maximum dish size 13", includes vinyl dust

11/11/2014

Specifications

cover, polyethylene construction, 28-5/8"W x 37-7/8"L x 31-7/8"H, black, NSF

<Optional> Note: verfiy plate size w/ owner

THREE (3) COMPARTMENT SINK (1 REQ'D)Item 25 -

Eagle Group Model FN2472-3-24-14/3

Spec-Master® Sink, Three Compartment, stainless steel, with 24" left & right-hand drainboards, 24"

front-to-back x 24"W sink compartment, 14"D, with 9-1/2"H splash, stainless steel open frame base,

boxed crossrails, stainless steel, 2 set of faucet holes, 14/304 stainless steel, NSF

Turn down back of splash per table with Z clip1 ea

Faucet, 12"L, splash-mounted mixing faucet, 8" centers, swing nozzle1 ea


Twist Handle Drain, 1-1/2 or 2" NPS connection3 ea

Twist bracket, per drain3 ea

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

1/2" (3) 2"1/2"1 139" 39"

OVERSHELF <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 26 -

Eagle Group Model WS12120-14/3

Wall Shelf, 12" x 120" 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel, 1 1/2" roll on front, 1 1/2" upturn on rear and

ends, stainless steel mounting brackets stud welded to shelf, NSF

Item 27 - MOP SINK

OVERSHELF <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 28 -

Eagle Group Model SWS1224-14/3

Wall Shelf, Snap-n-Slide®, 1 1/2" Rolled Front Edge, 12" x 24", 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel, 1 1/2"

upturn on rear and ends, stainless steel wall brackets mount to wall studs, no wall backing required, 90 lb.

weight capacity, NSF

Item 29 - SPARE NO.

DROP-IN COLD FOOD PAN (1 REQ'D)Item 30 -

Delfield Model N8144-FA

Drop-In Mechanically Cooled Pan, forced air, 3-pan size, accommodates 4" deep pans, insulated pan,

stainless steel inner liner & top, galvanized steel outer liner, includes adapter bars, self-contained

refrigeration, cUL, UL, NSF-7, (cut-out size 43" x 25-1/2"), 1/2 hp

115v/60/1-ph, 9.2 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard1 ea

Page 6 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

9.2 1/25-15P115 60 Cord & Plug11


Nationwide Fabricators Model COUNTER

Serving Counter, size and shape per plan 30" x 8' with tray slides.

DROP-IN HOT WELL (2 REQ'D)Item 32 -

Wells Model SS-10TDUCI

Food Warmer, top-mount, built-in, electric, for 11-quart round insert, drain, wet/dry operation,

thermostatic control, fully insulated, stainless steel construction, Wellslok, UL, cULus, NSF

Limited 2 year parts & 1 year labor warranty, standard2 ea

120v/60/1-ph, 825w2 ea

11 qt Round Inset, with hinged lid, no handles2 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

.825120 60 11

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

1/2"1 1


English Mfg. Model M-105IS-8

Sneezeguard, Self-Service Island, 81-120" long, posts 1" OD with stainless steel brushed finish (4) end

posts (4) center posts (6) 1/4" thick clear tempered glass panels with polished edges


Stainless steel, standard1 ea

Brushed #4, standard1 ea

Clear with polished edges1 ea

Cross support 20"-60" long for 1/4" or 3/8" glass1 ea

2" round flange1 ea

Item 34 - SPARE NO.

Page 7 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications

Item 35 - SPARE NO.

Item 36 - SPARE NO.

COFFEE BREWER (1 REQ'D)Item 37 -

Curtis Co. Model D1000GH62A000

G3 Airpot Coffee Brewer, tall, fresh brew, automatic, two independently programmable brewing heads

with digital LCD scroll-through programming, 4.4 liter (148 oz.) brew capacity, auto shut-off, hot water

faucet, Gourmet BC, s/s construction, s/s brew basket, 120/220v/60/1, 1800/2800 watts, 14.2/12.7 amps,

2/3W+G , UL, NSF

ThermoPro™ Airpot, 2.2 liter (74 oz.), lever action, brew-direct design, removable

top and pump, lockable lid, glass liner, stainless steel exterior (priced per each,

minimum order of 6 units required)

3 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

14.2/12.7 1.8/2.8120/220 60 11

ELECTRICAL 1 REMARKS

2/3-wire plus ground

REACH-IN UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR, 2 SECTION <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 38 -

Delfield Model UC4448N

Undercounter Refrigerator, Reduced Height, two-section, 48" W, 16.0 cubic feet, (2) doors, (2) 1/1 GN

shelves, stainless steel top, front & sides, ABS interior, 3" casters, front-breathing rear-mounted

refrigeration system, 1/5 hp, cUL, UL, NSF

<Optional> 115v/60/1-ph, 3.9 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard1 ea

<Optional> (3) Year parts & labor warranty standard1 ea

<Optional> Self-contained refrigeration, standard1 ea

<Optional> (5) Year compressor warranty standard1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

3.9 1/55-15P115 60 Cord & Plug11

ESPRESSO CAPPUCCINO MACHINE (1 REQ'D)Item 39 -

Nuova Simonelli Model APPIA 1GR SEMI

MAPIA5SEM01 Appia Espresso Coffee Machine, semi-automatic, 1 Group, 5 lt. boiler, stainless steel & ABS

construction, black

Page 8 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

13 1.55-15P120 60 Cord & Plug11

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

3/8"1 13/8"

DROP-IN SINK (1 REQ'D)Item 40 -

Advance Tabco Model DI-1-168

Drop-In Sink, 1-compartment, 16" wide x 14" front-to-back, 8" deep bowl, 18 gauge 304 series stainless

steel, with deck mounted gooseneck faucet, basket drain, NSF

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

1/2" 1-1/2"1/2"1 1

Item 41 - SPARE NO.

Item 42 - AIR POTS

Item 43 - POS

REFRIGERATED DISPLAY CASE (1 REQ'D)Item 44A -

Federal Industries Model ELPRSS3

Elements Low Profile Self-Serve Refrigerated Merchandiser (34.75”L x 34”W x 46”H), self contained

refrigeration with PTC condensate evaporator, adjustable temperature control, energy saving night

curtain, horizontal top light, one tier adjustable solid black metal shelf, black display deck and black

interior, black trim, clear Acrylic ends, cord and plug, 120v/60hz/1ph electrical, DOE 2012 compliant, UL

safety and UL sanitation approved, 1/3 HP

One year parts & labor warranty1 ea

Self-contained refrigeration standard1 ea

Five year compressor warranty (for self-contained units only)1 ea

120v/60/1, 1/3 hp, 16.0 amps, cord & plug (NEMA 5-20P), R404A refrigerant,

with condensate pan

1 ea

Page 9 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

16.0 1/3120 60 11


ICE CUBER (1 REQ'D)Item 47 -

Manitowoc Model IY-0524A

Indigo™ Series Ice Maker, cube-style, air-cooled, self-contained condenser, up to 485-lb approximately/24

hours, DuraTech™ exterior (stainless finish with innovative clear-coat resists fingerprints & dirt), half-dice

size cubes (not stackable)

3 year parts & labor Commercial warranty1 ea

5 year parts & labor Commercial warranty on evaporator1 ea

5- year parts & 3- year labor Commercial warranty on compressor1 ea

(-161) 115v/60/1ph, 14.4 amps1 ea

Arctic Pure® Pre-Filter Assembly, 5 micron filtration includes head, shroud,

hardware, mounting assembly, and one filter cartridge, (NOT stand-alone; should

be used in conjunction with primary water filter assembly)

1 ea

Ice Bin, with top-hinged front-opening door, approximately 430 lb ice storage

capacity, for top-mounted ice maker, stainless steel exterior

1 ea

Bin Adapter, 22" S, Indigo, RFS or RN ice machine to 30" B bins and S dispensers,

not for IB

1 ea

3 year parts & labor Commercial warranty1 ea

6" adjustable stainless steel legs, std.1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

14.4 1.564115 60 11

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

3/8" 1/2"1 1

3/4"2 2

PLUMBING 1 REMARKS

Drain for ice maker

BLAST CHILLER/FREEZER <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 48 -

Delfield Model T14D

Page 10 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications

ConvoChill™ T Series Blast Chiller/Shock Freezer, single section, reach-in, 154 lbs blast chill or 120 lbs

shock freeze capacity, auto hot gas defrost, electronic control with 99 program, HACCP memory, stainless

steel exterior & interior, self-contained, legs, UL, UL-EPH, 3 hp

<Optional> (3) Year parts & labor, (5) Year compressor warranty standard1 ea

<Optional> 220-230v/60/3, 20 amp service, standard1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

20 3220-230 60 31

RETHERMALIZATION OVEN <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 49 -

CresCor Model RO-151-F-1332D

Quiktherm™ Rethermalization Oven, insulated, capacity holds (18) 18" x 26" pans or (32) 13" x 26" angles

adjustable on 1-1/2" centers, (1) 1-1/2" probe, solid state electronic control, LED digital display, (18)

factory/field programmed retherm & hold cycles, recessed push/pull handles, field reversible dutch doors,

magnetic latches, anti-microbial latches, anti-microbial latches, 5" swivel casters (2 w/brakes), stainless

steel construction

<Optional> Standard Warranty: 1 yr labor, 2 yrs parts1 ea

<Optional> 208v/60/3-ph, 12000 w1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

12.0208 60 31

EXHAUST HOOD (1 REQ'D)Item 50 -

Greenheck Fan Model XBEW-210-S

Exhaust hood type 1 size and shape per plan

EXHAUST FAN (2 REQ'D)Item 50.1 -

Greenheck Fan Model XRUB-220HP-30

Exhaust Fan

MAKE UP AIR UNIT (1 REQ'D)Item 50.3 -

Greenheck Fan Model XDG-112-H20

Make Up Air Unite

FAN CONTROL CENTER (1 REQ'D)Item 50.4 -

Page 11 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications

Greenheck Fan Model XFCC-2

Fan Control Center

FIRE PROTECTION (1 REQ'D)Item 51 -

Ansul Fire Protection Model FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

Ansule fire protection system


Nationwide Fabricators Model S/S WALL FALSHING

S/S Wall flashing

GAS FRYER <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 53 -

Frymaster Model H55D

High Efficiency Open Full Pot Gas Fryer, 50 lb capacity, with digital controller, rack-type basket support,

basket hanger, twin baskets, automatic melt cycle, boil-out temp control, electronic ignition, center

mounted RTD, 1° compensating temperature probe, stainless steel frypot and door, enamel cabinet, legs,

80,000 BTU, part of the Manitowoc EnerLogic™ program, ENERGY STAR®, NSF

<Optional> Natural gas (specify elevation if over 4,999 ft.)1 ea

<Optional> Electrical specs must be specified1 ea

<Optional> Built-in filtration for (1) fryer1 ea

<Optional> Casters are standard with Footprint filters1 ea

<Optional> 120v/60/1, 9 amps with cord & plug, for filter unit1 ea

<Optional> (-SD) finish (stainless steel frypot and doors, enamel cabinet),

standard

1 ea

<Optional> Spreader cabinet, stainless steel door and enamel cabinet1 ea

<Optional> Food Warmer & Holding Station, includes; heat lamp, cord & plug, 12

x 20 x 2-1/2" stainless steel cafeteria-style pan & screen, NSF, cULus, CE

1 ea

<Optional> 120v/60/1, 6.9 amps, 6' cord & plug, for heat lamp, standard1 ea

<Optional> Safety System Moveable Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside dia., 48"

long, covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1

SnapFast™ QD, 1 SwivelMAX™, 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable

with hardware, limited lifetime warranty

1 ea

Page 12 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

9120 60 Cord & Plug11

Cord & Plug2

6.9120 60 Cord & Plug13


filter


heat lamp

PSIG (max)LB/HRKW PSIG (min)SIZE MBTU RETURN SIZEINLET SIZE

GAS STEAM

1/2" 80.01 1

COUNTERTOP HOTPLATE <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 54 -

Garland/US Range Model GTOG36-6

Hotplate, 36" W, countertop, gas, heavy-duty, (6) 30,000 BTU Starfire Pro open burners, manual controls,

pilot lights, stainless steel front, sides and back, 3-1/2" front rail, 4" high adjustable legs, 180,000 BTU

(Garland), CSA, NSF

<Optional> One year limited parts and labor warranty, covers products

purchased and installed in the USA only, standard

1 ea

<Optional> Gas type to be specified1 ea





1 ea


GAS STEAM

3/4" 1801 1

REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT STAND <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 55 -

Delfield Model F2987C

Refrigerated Low-Profile Equipment Stand, 87" W, three-section, (6) drawers (pans not included), marine

edge stainless steel top & drawer fronts, front non-spill edge, ABS interior sides, casters, side-mounted

refrigeration system with electric condensate evaporator, 1/4 hp, cUL, UL, NSF7

<Optional> 115v/60/1-ph, 10 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard1 ea



Page 13 of 21

of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

10 1/45-15P115 60 Cord & Plug11

COUNTERTOP GRIDDLE <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 56 -

Garland/US Range Model GTGG24-GT24M

Griddle, countertop, gas, heavy-duty, 24" W, 1" thick smooth steel griddle plate, 23-5/8" x 23" grill area,

snap action thermostatic controls, piezo pilot igniters, 4" deep front grease trough, stainless steel front,

sides and back, 4" adjustable feet, 56,000 BTU (Garland), CSA, NSF



1 ea






1 ea


GAS STEAM

3/4 56.01 1

CHARBROILER <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 57 -

Garland/US Range Model UTBG24-NR24

Charbroiler, countertop, gas, 24" W, heavy-duty, non-adjustable cast iron grates, 21-1/2” D broiling grid,

(1) variable hi/lo valve per burner, manual controls, crumb tray, reversible cast iron broiler racks in 3” W

sections, stainless steel front, sides, back & 3-1/2" front rail, 4" adjustable legs, 72,000 BTU (US Range),

CSA, NSF



1 ea






1 ea


GAS STEAM

3/4 72.01 1

1 ea

11/11/2014

Specifications

CONVECTION STEAMER <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 58 -

Cleveland Range Model 24CGA10.2

Steamcraft® Gemini™ 10 Convection Steamer, pressureless, gas, 2 compartments with individual

generators, (5) 12 x 20 x 2-1/2 pans/compartment capacity, electro-mechanical 60 minute timers, 1

standard treated & tap water connection, stainless steel construction, 6" adjustable legs with flanged

feet, twin 72,000 BTU, total 144,000 BTU

<Optional> 1-year limited warranty, standard1 ea


<Optional> (VOS115) 115v/60/1-ph, 2.0 amp, 2-wire (DO NOT connect to GFI

outlet)

1 ea

<Optional> SR-X Scale Inhibitor, Feeder & Deliming System, inhibits limescale

build up in steamers, housing converts ScaleKleen feeder for periodic delimings,

includes SR-X 10" clear housing, 1 SS-10 Cartridge, dip tube assy, (1) 2.2 lb.

package of ScaleKleen

1 ea




with hardware, 167,000 BTU/hr minimum flow capacity, limited lifetime

warranty

1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

2120 60 11


GAS STEAM

3/4" 144.01 1

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

3/8" 1-1/2"1 13/8"

3/4"2 2

TABLE TOP KETTLE (1 REQ'D)Item 59 -

Cleveland Range Model KET-12-T

Kettle, Electric, Table Top, Tilting, 12-gallon capacity, 2/3 steam jacket design, stainless steel exterior

finish, lever-type tilt, support console on right, splash proof

1-year limited warranty, standard1 ea

Page 15 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications

Standard wattage

1 ea

208v/60/3-ph, 9.8kW, 27.2 amp, standard1 ea

Double Pantry Faucet, with swing spout & mounting bracket for tilting kettles1 ea

Equipment Stand, open base with sliding drain drawer & splash screen, for two

SET10's or two SET15's, 55" x 20", 18" high, stainless steel top and legs, allows

unit to be hard piped to a floor drain

1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

27.2 9.8208 60 31

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

1/2"1/2"1 1

CONVECTION OVEN (1 REQ'D)Item 60 -

Blodgett Oven Model ZEPH-100-G DOUBL

Zephaire Convection Oven, gas, double-deck, standard depth, solid state manual controls, two speed fan,

(5) racks & (11) positions, flue connector, dependent glass doors, interior light, stainless steel front, sides

& top, 6" stainless steel legs, 100,000 BTU, ETL, NSF

(2) year parts, (1) year labor and (3) year door warranty (parts only), standard1 ea

Gas type to be determined1 ea

(2) 115v/60/1-ph, 6.0 amps, cord & plug, 1/3 hp, standard1 ea

Draft diverter, stainless steel, standard1 ea

4" low profile casters (set)1 ea

NOTE: DO NOT deduct cost of standard legs1 ea

Gas manifold for double ovens1 ea

Safety System Moveable Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside dia., 48" long, covered

with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1 SnapFast™ QD, 1

SwivelMAX™, 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware,

limited lifetime warranty

1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

(2) 6.0 (2) 1/3(2) 115 (2) 60 Cord & Plug(2) 11

Page 16 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications


GAS STEAM

3/4" 100.01 1

REFRIGERATED SANDWICH UNIT <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 61 -

Delfield Model 4448N-12

Sandwich/Salad Top Refrigerator, two-section, 48" W, 16.0 cubic feet, (2) doors, stainless steel top with

polyethylene cutting board & (12) 1/6 size plastic pans, ABS interior sides, stainless steel front & sides, 5"

casters, front-breathing rear-mounted refrigeration system, 1/5 hp, cUL, UL, NSF

<Optional> 115v/60/1-ph, 7.2 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard1 ea


<Optional> Self-Contained refrigeration, std,1 ea


<Optional> Stainless steel back, for 48" unit1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

7.2 1/55-15P115 60 Cord & Plug11

WORK TABLE (1 REQ'D)Item 62 -

Eagle Group Model T3072SE

Spec-Master® Work Table, 72"W x 30"D, 14/304 stainless steel top with rolled edges front & back, square

turndown ends, Uni-Lok® gusset system, 18 gauge stainless steel undershelf, (4) 1-5/8" diameter heavy

gauge s/s legs with 1" adjustable stainless steel feet, NSF

Overshelf, Table Mounted, single deck, 12"W x 6 feet long, 14 gauge 304

stainless steel, turned down edge, 1" dia. stainless steel tubular base legs, NSF

1 ea

Item 63 - OVER SHELF

WORKTOP FREEZER (1 REQ'D)Item 64 -

Delfield Model ST4148

Work Top Freezer Base, two-section, 48" W, 10.80 cubic feet, (2) doors, (4) shelves, stainless steel top

with 4" backsplash, stainless steel front & sides, ABS interior sides, 6" legs, rear-mounted (R404A)

refrigeration system, 115v/60/1, 5.6 amps, 6' cord, NEMA 5-15P, 1/3 hp, cUL, NSF

115v/60/1-ph, 5.6 amps, 6' cord, NEMA 5-15P, standard1 ea

(5) Year compressor warranty standard1 ea

(3) Year parts & labor warranty standard1 ea

3" NSF certified casters, set of 4, 3-3/4" ride height1 ea

Page 17 of 21

of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

5.6 1/35-15P115 60 Cord & Plug11

MIXER, PLANETARY <OPTIONAL> (1 REQ'D)Item 65 -

Globe Model SP60

Planetary Mixer, 60 qt., floor model, 3 fixed-speed, #12 hub, front-mounted push button controls,

gear-driven high torque transmission, heat-treated hardened steel alloy gears & shafts, thermal overload

protection, digital controls with 60 minute timer, safety interlocked bowl guard & bowl lift, includes:

stainless steel bowl, removable guard with built-in ingredient chute, stainless steel wire whip & aluminum

flat beater, & spiral dough hook, cast iron body, non-slip rubber feet, 6 ft cord, 3 HP, NSF, cETLus

<Optional> 2 year parts (excludes wear/expendable parts), 1 year labor warranty

- CONTACT FACTORY FOR DETAILS

1 ea

<Optional> 208v/60/3-ph, 9 amps, NEMA L15-20P1 ea

<Optional> Bowl Truck, heavy-duty, for SP60P 60 quart mixer1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

9 3L15-20P208 60 31

CAN OPENER (1 REQ'D)Item 66 -

Edlund Model 1S

Can Opener, manual, #1 with stainless steel base (for cans up to 11" tall), "Old Reliable"

1 year limited warranty, standard1 ea

SLICER (1 REQ'D)Item 67 -

Globe Model G12

Food Slicer, manual, medium duty, 12" diameter knife, top mounted sharpener, belt driven, ball bearing

chute slide, attached knife ring guard, knife cover interlock, removable slice deflector, power indicator

light, motor overload protection with manual reset, anodized aluminum construction, 1/2 HP, 115v/60/1,

3 amps, NEMA 5-15P, cETLus, NSF/ANSI 8-2010

1 year parts (excludes wear/expendable parts), 1 year labor warranty - CONTACT

FACTORY FOR DETAILS

1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

3 1/25-15P115 60 Cord & Plug11

11/11/2014

Specifications

WORK TABLE (1 REQ'D)Item 68 -

Eagle Group Model T30120SEM-BS

Spec-Master® Work Table, 120"W x 30"D, 14/304 stainless steel top with 4-1/2" backsplash, box marine

edge front & ends, heavy gauge stainless steel undershelf, (6) 1-5/8" O.D. heavy gauge stainless steel legs,

1" adjustable stainless steel feet, uni-lok® gusset system, NSF

For 10-1/2" backsplash, replace suffix -BS with -10BS,1 ea

Drawer Assembly, 20" x 20" x 5", 430 type stainless steel, removable drawer pan,

hemmed safety pull handle

1 ea

Sink, 20" x 20" x 14" bowl, for 30"W tables, complete with faucet and basket

drain (specify location)

2 ea


Twist Handle Drain, 1-1/2 or 2" NPS connection2 ea

Twist bracket, per drain2 ea

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

1/2" 1-1/2"1/2"1 1

2"2 2

OVERSHELF (1 REQ'D)Item 69 -

Eagle Group Model WS12120-14/3

Wall Shelf, 12" x 120" 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel, 1 1/2" roll on front, 1 1/2" upturn on rear and

ends, stainless steel mounting brackets stud welded to shelf, NSF


Nationwide Fabricators Model S/S CORNER GUARDS

Corner Guards 2" x2" x 48" H


HAND SINK (1 REQ'D)Item 75 -

Advance Tabco Model 7-PS-60-1X

Hand Sink, wall model, 14" wide x 10" front-to-back x 5" deep bowl, 20 gauge 304 series stainless steel,

with splash mounted faucet, basket drain, wall bracket, NSF & CSA listed

Page 19 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

1-1/2"1/2"1/2"1 1

REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR, 1 SECTION (1 REQ'D)Item 76 -

Delfield Model 6025XL-S

Refrigerator, Reach-in, single-section, 20.0 cubic feet, top mounted self-contained refrigeration 404A,

digital thermometer, stainless steel front, aluminum ends, ABS interior, (3) epoxy coated wire shelves,

solid hinged full height door, casters, 1/4 hp, cUL, UL, NSF

115v/60/1-ph, 6.0 amps, with cord & NEMA 5-15P, standard1 ea

(3) Year parts & labor warranty, standard (USA)1 ea

5 Year compressor warranty standard1 ea

Door hinged on right standard1 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

6 1/45-15P115 60 Cord & Plug11

HEATED BANQUET CART <OPTIONAL> (3 REQ'D)Item 77 -

Carter-Hoffmann Model BB120

Classic Carter™ Banquet Cabinet, mobile, insulated, single door for pre-plated food, (144) covered plates

capacity (without carriers), up to 10.5" diameter, (3) shelves, thermometer, flush mounted latch, push

handles, bottom mounted heater, 6" caster (2 swivel & rigid), stainless steel construction, 120v/60/1-ph,

1650w, 13.7 amps, NEMA 5-15P, cUL, ULeph, (RapidShip)

<Optional> 1 Year parts and labor3 ea

<Optional> 120/60/1, 1650 watts, 13.7 amps, 10 foot rubber cord NEMA 5-15P3 ea

<Optional> Standard package3 ea

<Optional> 4 Wheel brakes3 ea

<Optional> Cold plate, 15 x 203 ea


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

13.7 1.655-15P120 60 Cord & Plug11

COFFEE BREWER (1 REQ'D)Item 78 -

Curtis Co. Model GEM-12D-10

Page 20 of 21

11/11/2014

Specifications

Gemini® ADS Digital Satellite Coffee Brewer, 36 cup brew/batch, twin head, auto, fresh brew, touch key

controls, programmable brew volume & temp, sleep mode, hot water faucet, s/s gourmet brew basket,

s/s construction, 4" adjustable legs, (2) 1.5 gallon double wall insulated servers, 220v/60/1-ph, 29 amps,

6300w, 3W+G, UL, NSF


ELECTRICAL

PHASE AFF

29 6.3220 60 11

DIRECTSIZE

COLDSIZE

INDIRECTSIZE

HOTSIZE

HOTGPH

CONDENSERINLET SIZE

FILTEREDSIZE


WATER WASTE

HOTAFF

COLDAFF

FILTEREDAFF

1/4"1 1

Item 79 - SPARE NO.

Item 80 - MILLWORK COUNTERS

INSTALLATION (1 REQ'D)Item I - 1 -

United Restaurant Supply, Inc. Model DELIVERY AND SET

Delivery and set of equipment to job site ready for final connections by others. Includes hanging of hoods

(duct work by others), assembly of walk-in box, assembly of equipment.

INSTALLATION (1 REQ'D)Item R - 1 -

United Restaurant Supply, Inc. Model REFIGERATION INSTALATION

Refrigeration Installation, line runs, charging, calibration and start up of walk-in cooler.

FREIGHT (1 REQ'D)Item F1 -

FREIGHT Model FREIGHT

Freight

Page 21 of 21